On-line owner's handbook

You can find your handbook on the CITROËN website, under the Referring to the owner's handbook on-line also gives you
heading "MyCitroën". access to the latest information available, easily identified by
the bookmarks, associated with this pictogram:
This personal space provides you with information on your products
and services, a direct and special contact with CITROËN and
becomes a space tailored for you.

If the heading "MyCitroën" is not available on the public website for Select:
your country, you can find your handbook at the following address: the link in "Private customer access",
http://service.citroen.com the language,
the model,
the edition date appropriate for the date of registration of your vehicle.
You will find your handbook, presented in the same way as the paper
version.
We draw your attention to the following...

Your vehicle is fitted with only some of the equipment

described in this document, depending on the trim
level, version and the specifications for the country
in which it is sold.

CITROËN has a presence on every continent,

a complete product range,

The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories
which are not recommended by CITROËN may result
bringing together technology and a permanent spirit of innovation,
in a failure of your vehicle's electronic system. Please for a modern and creative approach to mobility.
note this specific warning and contact a CITROËN
dealer to be shown the recommended equipment and We thank you and congratulate you on your choice.
accessories.

At the wheel of your new vehicle,

getting to know each system,

Key
each control, each setting,
! safety warning
makes your trips, your journeys
contributes to the protection of the environment more comfortable and more enjoyable.
refer to the page indicated
Happy motoring!
 CONTENTS

FAMILIARISATION 4 Î 23 47 Î 66 86 Î 97

Ventilation 47 Lighting controls 86

Mono-zone digital Automatic illumination
air conditioning 49 of headlamps 88
ECO-DRIVING 24 Î 25
Dual-zone digital Headlamp adjustment 89
air conditioning 52 Directional lighting 90
Programmable heating 56 Wiper controls 92
Front seats 60 Automatic rain sensitive
I - MONITORING 26 Î 42 Rear seats 64 windscreen wipers 93
Mirrors 65 Courtesy lamps 94
Instrument panels 26 Steering wheel adjustment 66 Interior mood lighting 96
Trip computer 29
Warning and indicator lamps 32
Adjustment buttons 42 67 Î 85 VI - FITTINGS 98 Î 104

Remote control key 67 Interior fittings 98

Alarm 73 Mats 99
Electric windows 75 Front armrest 99
II - MULTIFUNCTION Doors 77 Boot fittings 101
SCREENS 43 Î 46 Boot 79
Sunroof (Saloon) 82
Monochrome screen C 43
Panoramic sunroof (Tourer) 83
Colour screen (eMyWay) 45
Fuel tank 84
Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 85

VII - CHILD
SAFETY 105 Î 113
Child seats 105
ISOFIX child seats 109
Child lock 113
 CONTENTS

XII - TECHNICAL
VIII - SAFETY 114 Î 125 X - CHECKS 161 Î 173 DATA
A 207 Î 222
Direction indicators 114 Bonnet 162 Petrol engines 207
Hazard warning lamps 114 Running out of fuel (Diesel) 164 Petrol weights 208
Horn 114 Petrol engines 165 Diesel engines 210
Emergency or assistance call 114 Diesel engines 167 Diesel weights 212
Tyre under-inflation detection 115 Checking levels 170 Diesel weights -
Braking assistance systems 117 Checks 172 commercial versions (Tourer) 216
Trajectory control systems 118 Dimensions 217
Seat belts 119 Identification markings 221
Airbags 122

XI - PRACTICAL XIII - AUDIO and

IX - DRIVING 126 Î 160 INFORMATION 174 Î 206 TELEMATICS 223 Î 298
Parking brake 126 Temporary puncture repair kit 174 Emergency or assistance 223
Electric parking brake 127 Changing a wheel 177 eMyWay 225
Hill start assist 134 Changing a bulb 181 Audio system 279
Manual gearbox 135 Changing a fuse 191
Gear shift indicator 136 Battery 196
6-speed electronic
gearbox system 137 Energy economy mode 198
Stop & Start 141 Towing the vehicle 199
Automatic gearbox 144 Towing a trailer 200
Fixed centred controls Roof bars 201
steering wheel 148
Speed limiter 150 Very cold protection 202
Cruise control 152 Cold climate screen 203 VISUAL
Lane departure warning system 154 Accessories 205 SEARCH 299 Î 304
Parking space sensor 155
Parking sensors 157
Reversing camera (Tourer) 158
"Hydractive III +" electronic ALPHABETICAL
suspension 159 INDEX 305 Î 309
 EXTERIOR

Stop & Start Xenon dual-function directional Panoramic sunroof (Tourer)

This system puts the engine tempo- headlamps This roof provides you with perfect
rarily into standby during stops in the This system automatically provides brightness in the passenger com-
traffic (red lights, traffic jams, etc...). you with extra visibility on bends. partment.
The engine restarts automatically as This lighting is linked with the cor- Sunroof (Saloon)
soon as you want to move off. nering lighting which maximises the
illuminated area at intersections and This also provides you with im-
Stop & Start reduces fuel consump- proved ventilation in the passenger
tion, exhaust emissions and noise when parking.
compartment.
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

when stationary.  89  82-83

 141

Lane departure warning system Parking sensors (visual and Tyre under-inflation detection
This driving aid warns you when you audible) This system checks the pressure of
unwittingly cross a lane marking. This system warns you if an obsta- the tyres automatically while driving.
cle is detected in front of or behind
the vehicle.

 154  157  115

4
 ACCESS
Remote control key Opening the boot Fuel tank

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
A. Unfolding/folding the key. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the
B. Normal locking of the vehicle (a sin- top left corner, then pull from the edge.
gle press) or deadlocking the vehi-
cle (two presses in succession).
C. Guide-me-home lighting. Locking filler cap
D. Unlocking the vehicle.
) Turn the key a quarter turn to lock or
unlock the filler cap.
) Press upwards on lever E. When refuelling, place the cap on hook F.
Tank capacity: approximately 71 litres.
 67 The boot automatically locks when the
vehicle is moving at a speed of over
6 mph (10 km/h), even if automatic cen-
tral locking is deactivated. It is unlocked  84
when a door is opened or when the cen-
tral locking button is pressed (speed
lower than 6 mph (10 km/h)).

 79-80

5
 ACCESS
Opening the bonnet Spare wheel Access to the spare wheel
To access the spare wheel:
) Saloon: raise the boot floor and fold
it in two.
) Tourer: raise the boot floor and at-
tach it using the retractable grip.
Secure the hook to the upper part of
the boot.
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

) To remove the spare wheel, detach

the strap then push the wheel for-
wards, before lifting it out.

The bonnet release should only be op- Saloon Temporary puncture repair kit
erated when the vehicle is stationary.
) Open the left hand front door.
) Pull release lever A to unlock the
bonnet.

Tourer The kit is a complete system comprised

of a compressor and a sealant car-
The tools are located in a protective tridge.
holder inside the spare wheel.
) Lift safety catch B, then raise the  174
bonnet.
 162  177
6
 INTERIOR

Dual-zone digital air conditioning Audio and communication systems

This air conditioning system provides inde- These systems benefit from the latest techno-
pendent adjustment of the comfort levels for logy: MP3 compatible audio system, Bluetooth®
the driver and front passenger. system, eMyWay.

 52  225, 279

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
Electric parking brake Parking space sensor
The electric parking brake combines automatic application when the The "Parking space sensor" sys-
engine is switched off, and automatic release when the vehicle is set in tem assists you in finding a park-
motion (automatic function activated by default). ing space.
Manual application/release is possible.
 127  155

7
 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1. Electric windows/door mirrors/child safety
controls.
2. Storing driver’s seat and door mirror settings.
3. Audio/telematic steering mounted controls.
4. Horn.
5. Steering mounted controls:
- Speed limiter
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

- Cruise control
6. Driver's airbag.
7. Navigation controls for the audio/telematic and
trip computer systems.
8. Driver's air vent.
9. Instrument panel.
10. Driver's air vent.
11. Stop & Start switch.
12. Lighting/Direction indicators/Foglamp/Voice
recognition control stalk.
13. Manual headlamp height adjustment.
14. Steering wheel adjustment.
15. Knee airbag.
16. Locking/unlocking of doors and boot.
17. Checks/Anti-intrusion alarm/Parking space
sensor controls.
18. Ignition switch.
19. Windscreen wiper/screenwash control stalk.
20. Oddments tray or programmable heater
controls.
21. USB port.

8
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1. Sunshine sensor.
2. Soft diffusion air conditioning adjustment wheel.
3. Passenger's airbag.
4. Side window demist vent.
5. Passenger's air vents.
6. Bonnet release.
7. Hazard warning lamps switch.

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
8. Switch in the glove box:
- Passenger’s airbag activation/deactivation
9. Glove box:
- Vehicle document storage
- Audio-video sockets
- Fusebox access flap
10. ESP / Parking Sensors / Lane Departure Warning
System controls.
11. Suspension controls:
- Ground clearance adjustment
- Sport mode
12. Armrest with cup-holder.
13. Electric parking brake.
14. Automatic gearbox SPORT/SNOW mode
controls.
15. Ashtray with cigarette lighter.
16. Gear lever.
17. Storage.
18. Audio and telematics system.
19. Air conditioning controls.
20. Storage.
21. Multifunction screen.
22. Emergency or assistance call controls.

9
 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instrument panel menu. Multifunction screen menu.

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

Activation of voice MODE: selection of the type

recognition or reminder of of information displayed in
navigation guidance. the multifunction screen.

Cruise control and speed

limiter. Audio.

The "SET +, PAUSE, VOL+, and MUTE"

buttons have touch identification to make
Telephone. them easier to use.

 148-149
10
Front seats Seat belt height adjustment
Manual adjustments Electric adjustments

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
The correct position for the upper seat
1. Seat cushion height, angle and slide belt anchorage places the belt across
adjustments. the middle of the shoulder.
2. Adjustment of the backrest angle. ) To adjust the seat belt for height,
3. Adjustment of top of backrest. compress the control and slide it in
4. Adjustment of lumbar support height the desired direction.
and level.
5. Massage function.  120
6. Heated seat control.

 61
A. Adjustment of the backrest angle.
Storing settings
B. Adjustment of the seat height.
C. Heated seat control. This function allows you to programme
D. Longitudinal adjustment of seat. and store the driver’s seat and the air
conditioning settings.
E. Adjustment of the backrest lumbar
support.
 63
 60
11
 Electric door mirrors Electrochrome rear view mirror Steering wheel adjustment
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

1. Selection of door mirror: Automatic day/night model ) Release the steering wheel by push-
A. Left. 1. Automatic detection of day/night ing control A forwards.
B. Right. mode. ) Adjust the height and the reach of
2. Mirror adjustment. the steering wheel, then lock the po-
C. Fold/Unfold. sition by pulling the lever upwards.
2. Adjustment control for mirror se-
lected.  66

 65  66

As a safety precaution, these opera-

tions must not be carried out while
moving.

12
 VISIBILITY
Lighting Front wipers Rear wiper (Tourer)

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
Ring A

Lighting off.
Control stalk positions ) Rotate control C to the desired posi-
Automatic illumination of head- 2 Fast wipe. tion.
lamps. 1 Normal wipe.
I Intermittent wipe. Off
Sidelamps. 0 Off.

One press downwards:

Dipped/main beam. Intermittent wipe
- AUTO: Automatic rain sensitive wip-
ers activated.
) Pull the control stalk towards you - Single wipe.
to change between dipped and main
beam. Screenwash
If the ignition has been switched off for
around 1 minute, automatic wiping must
Ring B be selected again.  92

Front foglamps on.

Screenwash
) Pull the screen wipe control stalk to-
Front and rear foglamps on. wards you.
 86  92-93
13
 V E N T I L AT I O N
Dual-zone digital air conditioning
Adjustment of temperature
on driver's side.

Front demisting - Adjustment of air flow.

defrosting.
Adjustment of air distribution
on driver's side.
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

Activation/deactivation of
Adjustment of temperature air conditioning.
on passenger's side.

Passenger's side
automatic operation.

Driver's side automatic

operation.
Adjustment of air distribution
on passenger's side.

Rear screen and door mirrors Air recirculation -

demisting - defrosting. fresh air intake.

Use of automatic mode is recommended by pressing the "AUTO" button.

 52
14
 MONITORING
Instrument panel

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
A. Fuel gauge and low fuel warning lamp. G. Trip mileage recorder reset button.
B. Cruise control/speed limiter information. H. Rev counter.
C. Coolant temperature. I. Engine oil temperature.
D. Speedometer. J. Automatic gearbox information.
E. Instrument panel screen.
F. Mileage recorder.
 26

Hazard warning lamps

The hazard warning lamps
can also be used with the
ignition switched off. - When the ignition is switched on, the orange and
red warning lamps come on.
 114 - When the engine is running, these warning lamps
should go off.
- If any warning lamps remain on, refer to the
"Monitoring" section.

15
 MONITORING
Tyre under-inflation detection Economy mode
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

After switching off the engine, some sys-

tems (radio, wipers, electric windows,
opening roof, electric seats, telephone,
video, interior lighting, motorised tail-
gate, etc.) are supplied electrically for a
The tyre under-inflation detection sys- maximum of no more than around one
tem is a driving aid which informs you hour, so as to avoid discharging the
of the state of your tyres. battery.
It does not replace either vigilance or
responsibility on the part of the driver.
Once this period is over, a message
is displayed in the instrument panel
 115 screen and the active functions are
placed on standby.
These functions will be automatically re-
activated when the vehicle is restarted.

This period may be reduced considerably

if the battery's state of charge is low.

 198

16
 PA S S E N G E R S A F E T Y
Seat belts and front Front passenger's airbag Child lock
passenger's airbag deactivation

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
The seat belt fastened/unfastened sta-
tus for each seat category is indicated
by the illumination or flashing of the To use a rear facing child seat in the front This deactivates the controls in the rear
warning lamps for each position: passenger's seat position, the passen- of the vehicle, both for the rear windows
A. Not fastened/unfastened front and/ ger's airbag must first be deactivated. and for opening the rear doors from the
or rear seat belts warning lamp. To do this: inside. The electric child safety device
B. Front left-hand seat belt warning lamp. is activated by pressing button J.
) With the ignition switched off, insert
C. Front right-hand seat belt warning the key into the switch I. The activation of the function is indi-
lamp. cated by a message on the instrument
) Turn the key to the "OFF" position; the panel screen and the lamp on button J.
D. Rear right-hand seat belt warning passenger's airbag is deactivated.
lamp. The front passenger's airbag deactiva-
E. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp. tion warning lamp G comes on when
the ignition is switched on.  113
F. Rear left-hand seat belt warning
lamp.
G. Front passenger's airbag deactiva-  123
tion warning lamp.
H. Front passenger's airbag activation
warning lamp.

 35, 37-38

17
 D R I V I N G S A F E LY
Electric parking brake Hill start assist
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

Automatic operation Manual operation

The electric parking brake releases au- The MANUAL application/release of
tomatically and progressively when you the parking brake is always possible To aid starting on a gradient, your ve-
press the accelerator. With the vehicle by pulling/pushing the control lever B, hicle is equipped with a system which
stationary, the parking brake is auto- keeping your foot on the brake pedal. keeps it immobilised for a short time
matically applied when the engine is (about 2 seconds), the approximate
switched off. time it takes to move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.
This system is only active when:
- The vehicle is completely stationary,
Before leaving the ve- Before leaving the ve- with your foot on the brake pedal.
hicle, check that warn- hicle, check that warn- - In certain conditions on a gradient.
ing lamp A (!) (red) in ing lamp A (!) (red) in
the instrument panel is the instrument panel is - With the driver's door closed.
on fixed (not flashing) and that warn- on fixed (not flashing) and that warn-
ing lamp P (red) in the control lever B ing lamp P (red) in the control lever B
is on. is on.

Never leave a child alone inside If you leave the vehicle with the Do not leave the vehicle while
! the vehicle with the ignition on, ! engine still running, apply the ! it is being held in the temporary
as they could release the park- parking brake manually. immobilisation hill start assist
ing brake. phase.

 127  128  134

18
 D R I V I N G S A F E LY
Speed limiter Cruise control Instrument panel screen

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
This system allows you to choose a maxi- This system allows you to maintain a
mum speed that you do not wish to exceed. constant vehicle speed programmed by
the driver.
The speed limiter or cruise control
Selection of "LIMIT": Activation mode is displayed in the instrument
of speed limiter mode. Selection of "CRUISE:" Activation panel screen when selected.
of cruise control mode.

"SET +": Increase the maximum "SET": Memorisation

speed. of the speed (system
paused).
Speed limiter
"SET -": Reduce the maximum
speed. "SET +": Increase the memo-
rised speed (system ON).

Suspension or resumption of Cruise control

mode. "SET -": Reduce the memo-
rised speed (system ON).
Deactivation.
The chosen speed is memorised. Suspension or resumption of
mode.

The chosen speed must be higher Cruise control is active on the higher
than 20 mph (30 km/h). Deactivation. gears of the gearbox. The chosen
speed must be higher than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
 150  152
19
 D R I V I N G S A F E LY
Direction indicators - Ignition switch
"Motorway" function
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

) Move the stalk briefly upwards or ● S: Steering lock

downwards, without going beyond To release the steering, turn the
the point of resistance; the direction steering wheel slightly while turning
indicators will flash 3 times. the key, but without forcing.
● M: Ignition on, drive position
 114 ● D: Starter
Release the key as soon as the en-
gine starts. Do not operate the star-
ter when the engine is running.

 70

20
 D R I V I N G S A F E LY
6-speed electronic gearbox Automatic gearbox
system
The automatic gearbox offers:
- Operation in auto-active mode,
with automatic adaptation to your
style of driving as well as to the road
profile (Position D).
- Operation in manual mode, with se-

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
quential gear changing (Position M).
- Operation in automatic SPORT
mode (Position D) and press but-
ton A.
- Operation in automatic SNOW
mode (Position D) and press but-
ton B.

R Reverse Positions
N Neutral P: Park.
A Automated mode R: Reverse. ! For safety:
M Manual mode N: Neutral. The gear lever can only be disen-
Using the paddles 1 "+" and 2 "-": D: Automatic mode. gaged from position P if you are
- changing gear in manual mode, pressing the brake pedal.
M: Manual mode.
- taking temporary manual control in When a door is opened, there is an
automated mode. audible signal if the gear lever is not
in position P.
In all circumstances, ensure that
SPORT programme that position P is selected before
leaving the vehicle.
) With the lever in A and the engine
running, press button 3.

 137-140  144-147
21
 D R I V I N G S A F E LY
Stop & Start Deactivation / Reactivation

Going into engine STOP mode Going into engine START mode

The "ECO" warning lamp comes

on in the instrument panel and The "ECO" warning lamp goes
the engine goes into standby: off and the engine restarts:
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

- with the 6-speed electronic gear- - with the gear lever in position A or
box system; at speeds below 4 mph M, release the brake pedal,
(6 km/h), press the brake pedal or
put the gear lever into position N. - or with the gear lever in position N
and the brake pedal released, move
to position A or M,
- or engage reverse.
In certain circumstances, the STOP You can deactivate the system at any
mode may not be available; the "ECO" time by pressing the "ECO OFF" button;
warning lamp flashes for a few sec- the button's warning lamp comes on.
onds, then goes off.

 141
In certain circumstances, START mode
may be invoked automatically; the
"ECO" warning lamp flashes for a few The system is reactivated automati-
seconds, then goes off. cally every time you start the engine
with the key.

 142
Before refuelling or doing anything
under the bonnet, you must switch off
the ignition with the key.

 142

22
Parking space sensor Parking sensors Lane departure warning system
(visual and audible)

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
You can select the "Parking space sen- You can activate/deactivate the parking Use of this system is recommended on
sor" by pressing button A, with the direc- sensors by pressing button B. When motorways and dual carriageways, and
tion indicator activated on the side of the the parking sensors are inactive, the operates only at speeds above 50 mph
space to be measured, a speed lower warning lamp in button B comes on. (80 km/h).
than 12 mph (20 km/h) and at a distance Pressing button C activates the system,
of less than 1.5 metres from the space. the warning lamp in the button comes on.
The fixed illumination of the warning  157
lamp indicates that the function is se-
lected.

 155

The system does not alert you if one

of your direction indicators is operating
and for approximately 20 seconds after
the direction indicator has stopped.

 154

23
 ECO-DRIVING
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO2 emissions.

Optimise the use of your Control the use of your

gearbox electrical equipment
With a manual gearbox, move off Before moving off, if the passenger Avoid running the engine before mov-
gently, change up without waiting compartment is too warm, ventilate it ing off, particularly in winter; your ve-
and drive by changing up quite soon. by opening the windows and air vents hicle will warm up much faster while
If your vehicle has the system, the before using the air conditioning. driving.
gear efficiency indicator invites you to Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the win-
change up; it is displayed in the instru- dows and leave the air vents open.
ment panel, follow its instructions. As a passenger, if you avoid connect-
Remember to make use of equipment ing your multimedia devices (film, mu-
that can help keep the temperature sic, video game...), you will contribute
in the passenger compartment down towards limiting the consumption of
(sunroof and window blinds...). electrical energy, and so of fuel.
With an automatic or electronic gear- Switch off the air conditioning, unless Disconnect your portable devices be-
box, stay in Drive "D" or Auto "A", ac- it has automatic digital regulation, as fore leaving the vehicle.
cording to the type of gearbox, without soon as the desired temperature is at-
pressing the accelerator pedal heavily tained.
or suddenly.
Switch off the demisting and defrosting
controls, if not automatic.
Drive smoothly Switch off the heated seat as soon as
possible.
Maintain a safe distance between ve-
hicles, use engine braking rather than
the brake pedal, and press the accel- Switch off the headlamps and front fo-
erator progressively. These practices glamps when the level of light does not
contribute towards a reduction in fuel require their use.
consumption and CO2 emissions and
also helps reduce the background
traffic noise.

If your vehicle has cruise control, make

use of the system at speeds above
25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is
flowing well.

24
Limit the causes of excess Observe the recommendations
consumption on maintenance
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; Check the tyre pressures regularly, When refuelling, do not continue after
place the heaviest items in the bottom when cold, referring to the label in the the 3rd cut-off of the nozzle to avoid
of the boot, as close as possible to the door aperture, driver's side. any overflow.
rear seats. Carry out this check in particular:
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle - before a long journey,
and reduce wind resistance (roof bars,
roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use - at each change of season,
At the wheel of your new vehicle,
a roof box in preference. - after a long period out of use. it is only after the first 1 800 miles
Remove roof bars and roof racks after Don't forget the spare wheel and the (3 000 kilometres) that you will see
use. tyres on any trailer or caravan. the fuel consumption settle down to a
consistent average.

At the end of winter, remove snow

tyres and refit your summer tyres.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly (en-
gine oil, oil filter, air filter...) and observe
the schedule of operations recommend-
ed by the manufacturer.

25
 MONITORING

INSTRUMENT PANELS - PETROL AND DIESEL - MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

Panel grouping together the dials and vehicle operation indicator and warning lamps.
A. Fuel gauge E. Indicator: G. Instrument panel screen indicating:
B. Indicator: ● Engine oil temperature ● Depending on the page
● Coolant temperature ● Gear lever position and gear selected with the left-hand
engaged (Automatic gearbox) thumb wheel on the steering
● Cruise control/Speed limiter wheel:
information F. Controls:
- Digital speed repeater
C. Speedometer ● Lighting dimmer
- Trip computer
D. Rev counter ● Resetting to zero of trip mile-
age computer and mainte- - Navigation (guidance) infor-
nance indicator mation
- Display of message alerts
- Engine oil level check
- Service indicator
● Permanently:
- Trip mileage recorder
- Total mileage recorder
26
 MONITORING

The main menu allows you to pro-

gramme certain vehicle and instru- I
ment panel screen functions:

"Choice of language" menu

This allows you to choose the display
and voice recognition language.

Main menu
The instrument screen A is located in
the centre of the instrument panel.
- With the vehicle stationary, you
can access the main menu of
the screen by quickly pressing
on the left-hand thumb wheel B
on the steering wheel.
- Whilst driving, the message "Action "Choice of units" menu "Vehicle parameters" menu
impossible whilst driving" is dis-
played on the instrument panel if you This allows you to choose metric or This allows you to access the para-
try to open the main menu. imperial units. meters relating to:
- The vehicle lighting.
- The comfort levels in the vehicle.

27
 MONITORING

"Lighting" menu "Comfort" menu

Once you have selected this menu, Once you have selected this menu,
you can: you can:
) Activate/deactivate the lighting ) Activate/deactivate the driver's
of the daytime running lamps*. welcome lighting function.
) Activate/deactivate the guide- ) Select unlocking of all the doors
me-home lighting and adjust its or just the driver's door.
duration. ) Activate/deactivate automatic
) Activate/deactivate the dual-function operation of the electric parking
Xenon directional headlamps. brake.

* Depending on country.
28
 MONITORING

TRIP COMPUTER The trip computer is displayed in the Trip zero reset
instrument panel screen. I
System which provides current in- ) Turn the left-hand thumb wheel A
formation concerning your journey on the steering wheel to display
(range, consumption, etc.) the various trip computer tabs in
succession:
- the current information tab is
displayed in zone B of the in-
strument panel screen, with:
● the range,
● the current fuel consumption,
● the digital speed reading or
the Stop & Start time counter.
) When the trip required is dis-
- the trip "1" tab is displayed in played, press the left-hand thumb
zone C of the instrument panel wheel on the steering wheel for
screen, with: more than two seconds.
Information displays ● the distance travelled, Trips "1" and "2" are independent
● the average fuel consumption, but their use is identical.
● the average speed, For example, trip "1" can be used for
for the first trip. daily figures and trip "2" for monthly
figures.
- the trip "2" tab is displayed in
zone C of the instrument panel
screen, with:
● the distance travelled,
● the average fuel consumption,
● the average speed,
for the second trip.

29
 MONITORING

A few definitions Current fuel Distance travelled

I (trip computer) consumption (miles or km)
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Range
(miles or km) This is the average fuel consump- This indicates the distance travelled
tion during the last few seconds. since the last trip computer zero reset.

This indicates the distance which

can still be travelled with the fuel re-
maining in the tank in relation to the
average fuel consumption over the Stop & Start time
last few miles (kilometres) travelled. This function is only displayed from counter
20 mph (30 km/h). (minutes / seconds or hours /
minutes)
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop &
This value may vary following a Start, a time counter calculates the
change in the style of driving or time spent in STOP mode during a
the relief, resulting in a significant Average fuel journey.
change in the current fuel con- consumption It resets to zero every time the igni-
sumption. (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) tion is switched on with the key.

This is the average fuel consump-

When the range falls below 20 miles tion since the last trip computer zero
(30 km), dashes are displayed. After reset.
filling with at least 5 litres of fuel,
the range is recalculated and is dis-
played when it exceeds 60 miles
(100 km). Average speed
(mph or km/h)

If dashes are displayed continu-

ously while driving in place of the This is the average speed calculated
digits, contact a CITROËN dealer since the last trip computer zero reset
or a qualified workshop. (ignition on).

30
 MONITORING

Return to the main instrument

panel screen display I
Successive rotations of the left-hand
thumb wheel on the steering wheel
allow you to return to the main instru-
ment panel screen display (vehicle
speed), via the navigation informa-
tion screen, then the screen display-
ing only the total mileage and the trip
mileage (bottom of screen).

Log of alerts
This function allows you to display
the log of alerts.
) Press on button A.
The following messages appear con-
secutively on the instrument panel
screen:
- Tyre pressure check.
- Service indicator reminder.
- Display of message alerts.
- Oil level check.

Display of navigation
information on instrument
panel screen
You can display navigation informa-
tion on the instrument panel screen
by rotating the left-hand thumb wheel
on the steering wheel.

31
 MONITORING

Warning and indicator lamps Warning lamps

I When the engine is running or the
Visual indicators which inform the driver of the occurrence of a malfunction or vehicle is being driven, the illumina-
fault (warning lamp) or of the operation of a system (operation or deactivation tion of one of the following warning
indicator lamp). lamps indicates a malfunction or
When the ignition is switched on fault which requires action on the
Certain warning lamps come on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. part of the driver.
When the engine is started, these warning lamps should go off. The illumination of a warning lamp is
always accompanied by the display
If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the information for the warning lamp of an additional message, to assist
concerned. you in identifying the fault.
Associated warnings If you encounter any problems, con-
tact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
The illumination, fixed or flashing, of certain warning lamps may be accompa- workshop.
nied by an audible signal and a message in the screen.

Warning lamp is on Cause Action / Observations

fixed, associated It is associated with a Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

STOP with another punctured tyre or the engine Park, switch off the ignition and call a
warning lamp. coolant temperature. CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Identify the fault by reading the message

shown in the screen, such as, for example:
- the closing of the doors, boot, rear
screen or bonnet,
A minor fault has occurred - the remote control battery,
temporarily. for which there is no specific
warning lamp. - the tyre pressures,
- saturation of the particle emission filter
Service (Diesel).
For any other faults, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.

A major fault has occurred Identify the fault by reading the message
fixed. for which there is no specific shown in the screen and contact a
warning lamp. CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
32
 MONITORING

Warning lamp is on Cause Action / Observations I

You must stop as soon as it is safe to
do so.
fixed, associated Top up with brake fluid recommended by
The braking system fluid level CITROËN.
with the STOP is too low.
warning lamp. If the problem persists, have the system
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
Braking qualified workshop.
+
fixed, associated You must stop as soon as it is safe to
The electronic brake force do so.
with the STOP distribution (EBFD) system
and ABS warning Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
has a fault.
lamp. a qualified workshop.

Anti-lock The vehicle retains conventional braking.

Braking The anti-lock braking system Drive carefully at reduced speed and
fixed.
System has a fault. contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
(ABS) workshop without delay.

You must stop as soon as it is safe to

The electric parking brake is
Electric not applied automatically. do so.
parking flashing. Park on flat level ground, switch off the
brake The application/release is
faulty. ignition and contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

workshop without delay.
Electric The parking brake can be released
The electric parking brake
parking fixed. manually.
has a fault.
brake fault For more information on the electric
parking brake, refer to the "Driving"
section.
33
 MONITORING

I Warning lamp is on Cause Action / Observations

Activate the function (according to country)

via the vehicle configuration menu or
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
Deactivation of The "automatic application" workshop if automatic application / release
the automatic (on switching off the engine) is not possible.
functions of fixed. and "automatic release" The parking brake can be released
the electric functions are deactivated or manually using the emergency release
parking brake faulty. procedure.
For more information on the electric parking
brake, refer to the "Driving" section.

The system optimises traction and

The ESP/ASR regulation is
flashing. improves the directional stability of the
active. vehicle.
Dynamic
stability
control fixed, accompanied Unless it has been
(ESP/ASR) by an audible signal deactivated with the indicator Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
and a message lamp in the button on, the a qualified workshop.
in the instrument ESP/ASR system has a fault.
panel screen.

The warning lamp should go off when the

The emission control system engine is started.
fixed. has a fault. If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN
Engine
autodiagnosis dealer or qualified workshop without delay.
system
Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter.
The engine management
flashing. Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
system has a fault.
a qualified workshop.

fixed, accompanied
Brake pad by an audible signal The brake pads are at an Have the brake pads replaced by a
wear and a message in advanced state of wear. CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
the multifunction
screen.
34
 MONITORING

Warning lamp is on Cause Action / Observations I

You must refuel as soon as possible to
avoid running out of fuel.
This warning lamp wil come on every time
When it first comes on there the ignition is switched on, until a sufficient
Low fuel addition of fuel is made.
fixed. remains approximately
level 5 litres of fuel in the tank. Fuel tank capacity: 71 litres.
Never continue to drive until you run out
of fuel, this could damage the emission
control and injection systems.

Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Maximum Wait until the engine has cooled down
The temperature of the
coolant fixed red. before topping up the level, if necessary.
cooling system is too high.
temperature If the problem persists, contact a
CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop.

The battery charging circuit The warning lamp should go off when
Battery has a fault (dirty or loose the engine is started.
fixed.
charge terminals, slack or cut If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN
alternator belt, ...). dealer or a qualified workshop.

Seat belt not

fastened / fixed. Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the
unfastened buckle.

The illuminated dots represent the not

+ The driver and/or the front/ fastened / unfastened passengers.
rear passenger has not They come on:
fixed, associated
fastened or has unfastened - fixed for 30 about seconds on starting
Seat belts with the seat belt
their seat belt. the vehicle,
not fastened / not fastened /
unfastened unfastened - fixed from 0 to 12 mph (0 to 20 km/h)
warning lampl. when driving,
- flashing above 12 mph (20 km/h),
accompanied by an audible signal for
about 120 seconds.
35
 MONITORING

Operation indicator lamps

I If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has come into operation.
It may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen.

Warning lamp is on Cause Action / Observations

Left-hand flashing with

direction The lighting stalk is pushed down.
buzzer.
indicator
Right-hand flashing with
direction The lighting stalk is pushed up.
buzzer.
indicator

Hazard The hazard warning lamps switch, The left-hand and right-hand direction
flashing with
warning located on the dashboard, has been indicators and their associated
audible signal.
lamps operated. indicator lamps flash simultaneously.

The lighting stalk is in the

Sidelamps fixed. "Sidelamps" position.

Dipped beam The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped

fixed.
headlamps beam headlamps" position.

Main beam The lighting stalk is pulled towards Pull the stalk to return to dipped
fixed.
headlamps you. beam headlamps.

Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards

Front fixed. The front foglamps are switched on. twice to switch off the front
foglamps foglamps.

Rear Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards

fixed. The rear foglamps are switched on.
foglamps to switch off the rear foglamps.

36
 MONITORING

Warning lamp is on Cause Action / Observations I

Wait until the warning lamp has switched
Diesel engine The ignition switch is at the off before starting.
fixed.
pre-heating 2nd position (ignition on). The duration for which the warning lamp is
on is determined by the climatic conditions.

The parking brake is applied or not Release the parking brake to switch
fixed. off the warning lamp, keeping your
properly released.
foot on the brake pedal.
Parking Observe the safety
brake recommendations.
The parking brake is not fully
flashing. For further information on the
applied or is released.
parking brake, refer to the "Driving"
section.

The control switch, located in the

glove box, is in the "ON" position. Turn the control switch to the "OFF"
Passenger's position to deactivate the front
The passenger's front airbag is passenger's airbag.
airbag fixed. activated.
system In this case you can install a rear-facing
In this case, do not install a rear- child seat.
facing child seat.

When the vehicle stops (red lights, The warning lamp goes off and the
traffic jams, ...) the Stop & Start engine restarts automatically in
fixed. system has put the engine into START mode, as soon as you want
STOP mode. to move off.

Stop & Start

STOP mode is temporarily
flashes for a few unavailable. Refer to "Driving - § Stop & Start"
seconds, then or for special cases with STOP mode
goes off. START mode is invoked and START mode.
automatically.

37
 MONITORING

Deactivation indicator lamps

I If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.
This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction screen.

Warning lamp is on Cause Action / Observations

The control, located in the

glove box, is set to the OFF
position. Set the control to the ON position to
Passenger's activate the passenger's front airbag.
airbag fixed. The passenger's front airbag
system is deactivated. In this case, do not fit a child seat in the
rear-facing position.
In this case you can install a
"rear facing" child seat.

The button, located in the

middle of the dashboard, is Press the button to activate the ESP/ASR.
pressed. Its indicator lamp Its indicator lamp switches off.
is on. The ESP/ASR system is activated
ESP/ASR fixed. The ESP/ASR is deactivated. automatically when the vehicle is started.
ESP: electronic stability If deactivated, the system is reactivated
programme. automatically from approximately 30 mph
(50 km/h).
ASR: anti-skid regulation.

38
 MONITORING

Service indicator Less than 600 miles (1 000 km) Service overdue
remain before the next service is due For 7 seconds after the ignition is I
This information is displayed for a Example: 500 miles remain before switched on, the spanner flashes
few seconds when the ignition is the next service is due. to indicate that the service must be
switched on. It informs the driver carried out as soon as possible.
when the next service is due, in ac- For 7 seconds after the ignition is
cordance with the manufacturer's switched on, the central screen in- Example: the service is overdue by
servicing schedule. dicates: 180 miles.
The point at which the service is due For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched
is calculated from the last indicator on, the central screen indicates:
zero reset. It is determined by two
parameters:
- the distance travelled,
- the time elapsed since the last
service.
The spanner remains on in the
More than 2 000 miles (3 000 km) screen to indicate that a service The spanner remains on in the
remain before the next service is due must be carried out soon. screen to indicate that a service
When the ignition is switched on, no should have been carried out.
service information appears on the
instrument panel central screen.
Between 600 miles (1 000 km)
and 2 000 miles (3 000 km) remain
before the next service is due
For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the spanner symbolising the service
operations comes on. The instrument pan-
el central screen indicates the distance re-
maining before the next service is due.
Example: 1 900 miles remain before the
next service is due.
For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched The distance remaining may be
on, the central screen indicates: weighted by the time factor, depend-
ing on the driver's driving habits.
Therefore, the spanner may also
come on if you have exceeded the
two year service interval.

39
 MONITORING

Service indicator zero reset Engine oil level indicator Oil level gauge problem
I
System which informs the driver
whether the engine oil level is cor-
rect or not.
This information is indicated for a
few seconds when the ignition is This is indicated by the message "Oil
switched on, after the service infor- level measurement invalid". Contact
mation. a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The level read will only be correct if
the vehicle is on level ground and
the engine has been off for more
than 30 minutes.

After each service, the service indi-

cator must be reset to zero.
The procedure for resetting to zero
is as follows: Oil level correct
) switch off the ignition,
) press and hold the trip distance
recorder zero reset button,
) switch on the ignition; the dis-
tance recorder display begins a
countdown,
) when the display indicates "=0", Oil level incorrect
release the button; the spanner
disappears.
Following this operation, if you wish
to disconnect the battery, lock the
vehicle and wait at least five minutes
for the zero reset to be taken into ac- This is indicated by the message
count. "Oil level incorrect".
If the low oil level is confirmed by a
check using the dipstick, it is essen-
tial that the level is topped up to pre-
vent damage to the engine.

40
 MONITORING

Engine oil temperature gauge Coolant temperature gauge Fuel gauge

I

Under normal operating conditions, Under normal operating conditions, On horizontal ground, illumination of
the bars should be within section 1. the bars should be within section 1. the fuel low warning lamp indicates
In severe operating conditions, the In severe operating conditions, the that you are at the reserve level.
bars may extend into section 2. bars may extend into section 2, the An alert message is displayed in the
In this event, slow down, and if neces- engine coolant temperature warning instrument panel.
sary, stop the engine and check the lamp A and the STOP warning lamp
levels (see corresponding section). come on, stop as soon as it is safe
to do so. Switch off the ignition. The
cooling fan may continue to oper-
ate for a certain time.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If the SERVICE warning lamp comes
on, check the levels (see corre-
sponding chapter).

41
 MONITORING

Total distance recorder Lighting dimmer Deactivation

I When the lighting is off, or in day
System which measures the total System for manual adjustment of mode on vehicles fitted with daytime
distance travelled by the vehicle the brightness of the instruments running lamps, pressing the buttons
during its life. and controls in relation to the exte- does not have any effect.
The total and trip distances are dis- rior brightness.
played for thirty seconds when the
ignition is switched off, when the
driver's door is opened and when
the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

To conform to legislation in the

country you are crossing, change
the units of distance (miles or km)
via the configuration menu.

Trip distance recorder

System which measures a distance Operation
travelled during a day or other pe- ) Press button A to decrease the
riod since it was reset to zero by the brightness of the instruments
driver. and controls.
) Press button B to increase the
brightness of the instruments
and controls.

) With the ignition on, press the

button until zeros appear.

42
 M U LT I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S

MONOCHROME SCREEN C Controls Main Menu

Displays in the screen Press on the button A to view the

Main Menu of the multifunction
screen. This menu gives you access II
to the following functions:

Personalisation -
Configuration

Displays according to context: This permits activation / deactivation of the:

- time - brightness and contrast of the
- date, multifunction screen,
- ambient temperature with air - date and time,
conditioning (the value displayed - units of the ambient temperature
flashes if there is a risk of ice), displayed.
- parking sensor information,
- audio functions Radio-CD
- alert messages,
(see "Audio and Telematics"
- settings menus for the screen section)
and vehicle systems.
A. Access to the "Main Menu" Bluetooth® system
B. Cancel the operation or return to
the previous display (see "Audio and Telematics"
C. Scroll through the screen menus section)
Confirmation at the steering wheel
D. Confirmation at the audio system
control panel

It is recommended that the driver

should not operate the controls
while the vehicle is in motion.

43
 M U LT I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S

Adjusting the brightness Adjusting the date and Choosing the units
and contrast the time
) Press on A.
) Press on A. ) Press on A. ) Use C to select the "Choice of
II ) Use C to select the "Brightness - ) Use C to select the"Date and units" menu, then confirm your
video adjustment" menu. Confirm time" menu, then confirm your choice with a press on C on the
with a press on C on the steering choice with a press on C on the steering wheel or D on the audio
wheel or D on the audio equip- steering wheel or D on the audio system.
ment. system. ) Using C, select the unit then val-
) Select the configuration of the ) Select the screen configuration idate with a press on C on the
screen using C. Confirm with a using C. Confirm with a press steering wheel or D on the audio
press on C on the steering wheel on C on the steering wheel or D system.
or D on the audio equipment. on the audio system ) Confirm with "OK" in the screen.
) Select the brightness setting. ) Select the date and the time set-
Confirm with a press on C on the tings, using B. Confirm with a
steering wheel or D on the audio press on C on the steering wheel
equipment. or D on the audio system.
) Select the inverse or normal dis- ) Press C to select the values you
play mode using C then validate wish to modify. Confirm your Selection of the type of
with a press on C on the steering choice with a press on C on the information displayed (Mode)
wheel or D on the audio equip- steering wheel or D on the audio
ment. To adjust the brightness system. Successive presses on the end of
select "+" or "-" and save your ) Confirm with "OK" on the screen. the wiper stalk or on the MODE but-
setting with a press on C. ton on the audio equipment permit
) Confirm with "OK" in the screen. selection of the type of informa-
tion presented in the multifunction
screen (date or radio, CD, MP3 CD,
CD changer).

44
 M U LT I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S

COLOUR SCREEN Controls "SETUP" menu

(WITH eMyWay)

II

Displays in the screen From the eMyWay control panel, to ) Press the "SETUP" button to
select one of the applications: gain access to the configuration
Depending on the context, it displays: ) press the dedicated "RADIO", settings menu:
- time, "MUSIC", "NAV", "TRAFFIC", - "Display configuration",
- date, "SETUP" or "PHONE" button - "Speech synthesis setting",
for access to the corresponding
- altitude, menu, - "Select language",
- ambient temperature (the value ) turn dial A to select a function, - "Define vehicle parameters",
displayed flashes if there is a risk an item in a list,
of ice), - "Alert log".
) press button B to confirm the se-
- parking sensor information, lection,
- audio functions, or
- telephone information and con- ) press the "ESC" button to aban-
tacts, don the current operation and re-
- satellite navigation system infor- turn to the previous display.
mation,
- alert messages,
! For safety reasons, configu-
ration of the multifunction
screen by the driver must be only
- settings menus for the screen, done when stationary.
navigation system and vehicle
equipment.
For more information on these
applications, refer to the "Audio
Equipment" section.

45
 M U LT I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S

Display configuration Speech synthesis setting Define vehicle parameters*

This menu allows you to choose a This menu allows you to set the volume This menu allows you to activate or
colour scheme for the screen, adjust for navigation instructions and to chooses deactivate certain driving and com-
the brightness, set the date and time the type of voice (male or female). fort systems, listed by category:
II and choose the units for distance - Parking help
(km or miles), fuel consumption
(l/100 km, mpg or km/l) and tempe- - Screen wiper functions
rature (°Celsius or °Fahrenheit). ● Engage rear wiper when in re-
verse (Rear wiper coupled to
reverse; see "Visibility"),
- Configure lighting (see "Visibility"):
● Duration of guide-me-home
Select language lighting,
When setting the time, you can This menu allows you to select the ● Directional headlamps function,
choose to "Synchronise minutes language used by the screen display: ● Daytime running lamps function**.
with GPS", so that the minutes (Français, English, Italien, Portugais,
are set automatically by satellite Espagnol, Allemand, Néerlandais,
reception. Turc, Polonais, Russe).

Alert log
It lists the active alerts by displaying
the various associated messages in
turn.

* Depending on country.
** Depending on country of sale.
46
COMFORT

VENTILATION
A. Sunshine sensor.
B. Soft air diffusion grille.
The soft air diffusion grille located
in the centre of the dashboard pro-
vides optimum distribution of the
air for the front seats.
III
This system eliminates unpleas-
ant air currents while maintaining
an optimum temperature in the
passenger compartment.
To open the soft air diffusion
grille, turn the wheel upwards.
To close the soft air diffusion
grille, turn the wheel fully down-
wards.
In very hot weather, to obtain
more satisfactory central and
side ventilation, it is advisable to
close the diffused air grille.
C. Cooled glove box.
D. Rear passenger vents.

47
 COMFORT

HEATING, VENTILATION In order to be effective, the air con- Air circulation

AND AIR CONDITIONING ditioning must be used with the win-
RECOMMENDATIONS dows closed. If the vehicle has been Maximum comfort is obtained by
parked in the sun for a long period means of a good distribution of air in
and the interior temperature is very the passenger compartment, both in
high, first ventilate the passenger the front and in the rear.
Air conditioning compartment with the windows To obtain a uniform distribution of
III open for a few minutes, then close air, take care not to block the ex-
We recommend use of the automatic the windows.
regulation of the air conditioning. terior air intake grille located at the
To keep the air conditioning system base of the windscreen, the vents,
It permits automatic and optimised in good working order it is essential the air outlets under the front seats
control of all of the following func- that it is operated at least once a and the air extractor located behind
tions: air flow, temperature in the month. the flaps in the boot.
passenger compartment and air
distribution, by means of various The air conditioning uses engine pow- The front and rear vents are fitted
sensors (ambient temperature, sun- er during its operation. As a result, with thumbwheels to adjust the air
shine). This eliminates any need for the fuel consumption of the vehicle flow and direction. We recommend
you to change your settings other increases. that you leave all of the vents open.
than the temperature value dis- In certain cases of particularly ardu-
played. ous use (e.g. towing the maximum
) Take care not to cover the sun- load on a steep gradient in high tem-
shine sensor A. peratures), switching off the air con- Dust filter / Odour filter
ditioning saves engine power and (active carbon)
If you select the automatic mode improves the towing capacity.
(by pressing the "AUTO" control)
and leave all of the vents open, opti- There is a filter for excluding odours
mum comfort will be maintained and and dust.
humidity and condensation will be This filter must be changed in line
removed regardless of the exterior Air inlet with the vehicle's servicing schedule
climatic conditions. (see the vehicle's servicing booklet).
The temperature in the passenger Check that the exterior grille for the
compartment can only be lower than air inlet, at the bottom of the wind-
the ambient temperature if the air screen, is clean and free of dead
conditioning is on. leaves, snow, etc.
When washing the vehicle using a
high pressure nozzle, avoid spray-
ing at the air inlet.

48
 COMFORT

DIGITAL AIR CONDITIONING (MONO-ZONE) 2. Temperature adjustment

Turn control 2 to change

the temperature:
- Clockwise to in-
crease the temper-
ature.
III
- Anticlockwise to reduce the tem-
perature.
The setting required is displayed.
The air conditioning system operates 1. Automatic operation The value indicated in the screen
with the engine running. corresponds to a level of comfort
Mono-zone: this is the overall regu- This is the normal sys- and not to a temperature in degrees
lation of the temperature, distribution tem operating mode. Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on
and flow of air in the passenger com- In accordance with the the screen configuration.
partment. level of comfort chosen, A setting around the value 21 usually
pressing this control, provides optimum comfort. However,
The symbols and messages associ- confirmed illumination
ated with the digital air conditioning depending on your requirements, a
of indicator lamp A, permits automatic setting between 18 and 24 is normal.
controls appear in the multifunction and simultaneous control of all of the
screen. following functions: On entering the vehicle, the interior
1. Automatic operation temperature may be much colder (or
- Air flow. warmer) than is comfortable. There
2. Temperature adjustment - Temperature in the passenger is no need to change the tempera-
3. Air distribution adjustment compartment. ture displayed to obtain rapidly the
4. Activation/deactivation of the air - Air distribution. level of comfort required.
conditioning - Air intake. The automatic regulation of the air
5. Air flow adjustment conditioning will use its maximum
- Air conditioning. performance settings to correct the
6. Front demisting - defrosting
temperature difference as quickly as
7. Rear demisting - defrosting possible.
It is advisable to leave all of the
8. Air recirculation - intake of exterior vents open.
air
Simply pressing one of the controls,
9. Screen with the exception of control 2, switch-
es the system to manual mode.
Indicator lamp A goes off.

49
 COMFORT

Control via the manual controls 4. Air conditioning Switching off the ventilation
It is possible to adjust one or more The air conditioning will only oper-
functions manually, while leaving the ate when the engine is running. The ) Turn control 5 to the
other functions in automatic mode. air blower control (air flow adjust- left until the flow of
) Press one of the controls, with ment) must be active to obtain air air stops.
the exception of that which regu- conditioning.
lates the temperature 2. Indicator
III lamp A goes off. ) Press control 4. Indicator The "OFF" symbol is displayed in
Switching to manual mode may result lamp B comes on. the multifunction screen.
in discomfort (temperature, humidity, This action switches off the screen
odour, condensation) and may not and the indicator lamps.
provide optimum comfort.
It deactivates all of the system's
To return to automatic mode, press In order to be effective, the air condi- functions, with the exception of the
the "AUTO" control. tioning must be used with the windows rear screen demisting.
closed. The temperature-related comfort is
Deactivating the air conditioning may no longer controlled (temperature,
result in discomfort (temperature, humidity, odour, condensation).
humidity, odour, condensation). Avoid driving for too long with the air
3. Air distribution adjustment
conditioning off.
) Press the controls 3 5. Air flow adjustment
to change the distri-
bution of the air flow. ) Turn control 5 to the To reactivate the air conditioning:
right to increase the
air flow or to the left ) Press control 1.
to reduce it.
6. Front demisting - defrosting
The indicator lamps corresponding
to the distribution chosen come on:
The air flow level is indicated by the In certain cases, the
- Windscreen and front side win- progressive illumination of the bars "AUTO" mode may not
dows. in the control panel screen 9. be sufficient to demist or
- Front ventilation (central and To prevent condensation and dete- defrost the windows (hu-
side vents and air diffusion grille rioration of the quality of the air in midity, several passen-
if open) and rear ventilation. the passenger compartment, ensure gers, ice).
- Front and rear footwells. that an adequate flow of air is main- ) Press control 6 to clear the win-
Simultaneous display of the distribu- tained. dows quickly. The indicator lamp
tion of air to the windscreen and side comes on.
windows and of front and rear ventila-
tion is not possible.
50
 COMFORT

The "Demisting" mode controls the However, demisting resumes when

temperature, air flow and intake the engine is switched on again. - When starting with the engine
and distributes the ventilation to the cold, the flow will reach its
Switch off the rear screen and door optimum level gradually to
windscreen and front side windows. mirrors demisting when you consider prevent an excessive distribu-
Resuming manual control exits from this necessary as low current con- tion of cold air.
"Demisting" mode. It must be can- sumption reduces fuel consumption.
celled to permit renewal of the air - When entering the vehicle af-
in the passenger compartment and ter it has been parked for a III
demisting. fairly long period, if the inte-
rior temperature is very differ-
Once the screen is clear, press- ent from your comfort setting
ing control 1 returns the system to there is no need to change
"AUTO" mode. the temperature displayed
in order to quickly reach the
level of comfort required. The
7. Rear demisting - defrosting 8. Intake of exterior air / system automatically uses its
The heated rear screen operates in- Recirculation of interior air maximum performance to cor-
dependently of the air conditioning This function enables you to isolate rect the difference in tempera-
system. the passenger compartment from ture as quickly as possible.
exterior fumes and odours. - The water resulting from the
air conditioning condensation
) Press control 7, with ) Press control 8 to set is discharged via an open-
the engine running, the air intake mode, ing provided for this purpose;
to demist the rear the indicator lamp therefore, a puddle of water
screen and the door comes on. may form underneath the ve-
mirrors. The indica- hicle when stationary.
tor lamp comes on. - In all seasons, if the weather
It must be cancelled as soon as
possible to permit renewal of the is cool, the air conditioning
air in the passenger compartment is useful as it removes the
Demisting is switched off automatically humidity from the air and the
to prevent an excessive consumption and demisting.
condensation. Avoid driving
of current and in relation to the ambient for prolonged periods with the
temperature. air conditioning switched off.
It may be stopped by pressing con- You can store the air condition-
trol 7 again or when the engine is ing settings. Refer to the "Storing
switched off. driving positions" section.

With Stop & Start, when demist-

ing has been activated, the STOP
mode is not available.
51
 COMFORT

DIGITAL AIR CONDITIONING (DUAL-ZONE) 1a-1b. Automatic operation

This is the normal sys-

tem operating mode.
In accordance with the
level of comfort chosen,
III pressing this control,
confirmed by illumina-
tion of indicator lamp A, permits au-
tomatic and simultaneous control of
all of the following functions:
The air conditioning system operates with the engine running. - Air flow.
Dual-zone: this is the independent regulation of the temperature and air distri- - Temperature in the passenger
bution on the driver's side and the front passenger's side. compartment.
The driver and front passenger can each adjust the temperature and the distri- - Air distribution.
bution of the air to suit their requirements. - Air conditioning.
The symbols and messages associated with the digital air conditioning controls - Automatic air recirculation.
appear in the multifunction screen.
It is advisable to leave all of the
1a. Automatic operation on the 4a. Driver's zone screen vents open. Simply pressing one
driver's side of the controls, with the exception
4b. Passenger's zone screen of temperature regulation 2a and
1b. Automatic operation on the 5. Air flow adjustment 2b, switches the system to manual
passenger's side mode. Indicator lamp A goes off.
6. Activation/deactivation of the air
2a. Temperature adjustment on conditioning
the driver's side
7. Air recirculation – intake of
2b. Temperature adjustment on exterior air
the passenger's side
8. Rear demisting – defrosting
3a. Air distribution adjustment on
the driver's side 9. Front demisting – defrosting
3b. Air distribution adjustment on
the passenger's side

52
 COMFORT

2a-2b. Temperature adjustment Control via the manual controls 3a-3b. Air distribution adjustment
) Press one of the controls, with
the exception of temperature
regulation 2a and 2b. The indi- ) Press control
cator lamps A in the "AUTO" 3a to change
controls go off. the distribu-
tion of the air
It is possible to adjust one or more flow on the
functions manually while leaving the driver's side. III
other functions in automatic mode.
) Turn control 2a to change the Switching to manual mode may re-
temperature on the driver's side sult in discomfort (temperature, hu-
and control 2b to change the midity, odour, condensation) and ) Press control 3b to change the
temperature on the passenger's may not provide optimum comfort. distribution of the air flow on the
side: to the right to increase the To return to "AUTO" mode, press passenger's side.
temperature or to the left to re- controls 1a and 1b. The indicator The indicator lamps corresponding
duce it. lamps A come on. to the distribution chosen come on:
The setting required is displayed. - Windscreen and front side win-
The value indicated on the display dows.
corresponds to a level of comfort - Front ventilation (central and
and not to a temperature in degrees side vents and air diffusion grille
Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on if open) and rear ventilation.
the screen configuration. - Front and rear footwells.
A setting around the value 21 usually
provides optimum comfort. However,
depending on your requirements, a Simultaneous display of the distribu-
setting between 18 and 24 is normal. tion of air to the windscreen and side
On entering the vehicle, the interior windows and of front and rear venti-
temperature may be much colder (or lation is not possible.
warmer) than is comfortable. There
is no need to change the tempera-
ture displayed in order to quickly ob-
tain the level of comfort required.
The automatic regulation of the air
conditioning will use its maximum
performance settings to correct the
temperature difference as quickly as
possible.

53
 COMFORT

5. Air flow adjustment 7. Air recirculation - intake of Closing the air intake
exterior air
) Press the control: Automatic air intake mode ) Press control 7 to close
- to increase the air flow, It is activated by default the exterior air intake.
- to reduce the air flow. in automatic comfort reg-
ulation.
III While retaining the other settings,
Automatic mode is acti- this position allows the driver to iso-
The air flow level is indicated by the vated with reverse gear or late the passenger compartment at
progressive lighting of the fan blade operation of the screen- any time from unpleasant exterior
indicator lamps. wash. odours and fumes.
Reducing the flow to minimum This function permits re-
switches the air conditioning It must be cancelled as soon as pos-
circulation of the air and isolation sible to permit renewal of the air in
OFF. the passenger compartment from
To prevent condensation and dete- the passenger compartment and
exterior fumes and odours. It is inac- demisting.
rioration of the quality of the air in tive when the ambient temperature
the passenger compartment, ensure is below +5 °C to avoid the risk of
that an adequate flow of air is main- misting inside the vehicle.
tained.
Intake of exterior air

6. Air conditioning ) Press control 7 once

to open the exterior air
intake.
The air conditioning will
only operate when the
engine is running. The air
blower control (air flow ad-
justment) must be active in
order to obtain air conditioning.
) Press control 6. The indicator
lamp comes on. You can store the air condition-
ing settings. Refer to the "Storing
In order to be effective, the air con- driving positions" section.
ditioning must be used with the win-
dows closed.

54
 COMFORT

8. Rear demisting - defrosting 9. Front demisting - defrosting

When starting with the engine
cold, air flow will reach its opti-
The heated rear screen In certain cases, the mum level gradually to prevent an
operates independently "AUTO" mode may not excessive distribution of cold air.
of the air conditioning be sufficient to demist When entering the vehicle after it
system. or defrost the windows has been parked for a fairly long
(humidity, several pas- period, if the interior temperature
) Press control 8, with the en- sengers, ice). is very different from your comfort
III
gine running, to demist the rear ) Press control 9 to clear the win- setting there is no need to change
screen and the mirrors. The indi- dows quickly. The indicator lamp the temperature displayed in or-
cator lamp comes on. comes on. der to quickly reach the level of
Demisting is switched off automatical- This system controls the temperature, comfort required. The system
ly to avoid excessive consumption of air flow and intake and distributes the automatically uses its maximum
current and depending on the exterior ventilation to the windscreen and front performance to correct the differ-
temperature. side windows. ence in temperature as quickly as
It may be stopped by pressing possible.
Resuming manual control exits from
control 8 again or when the engine the "Demisting" mode. It must be The water resulting from the air
is switched off. cancelled as soon as possible to conditioning condensation is dis-
In this latter case, the demisting re- permit renewal of the air in the pas- charged via an opening provided
sumes if the engine is switched on senger compartment and demisting. for this purpose; therefore, a pud-
again within one minute. dle of water may form underneath
Pressing one of the controls 1a the vehicle when stationary.
and 1b returns the system to the
"AUTO" mode. In all seasons, if the weather is
cool, the air conditioning is use-
ful as it removes the humidity
Switch off the rear screen and exterior from the air and the condensa-
mirrors demisting when you consider tion. Avoid driving for prolonged
this necessary as low current consump- periods with the air conditioning
tion reduces fuel consumption. switched off.
With Stop & Start, when demisting
has been activated, the STOP mode
is not available.

55
 COMFORT

PROGRAMMABLE HEATING Programming remote control Displaying the functions

The heating system programming
remote control consists of the fol-
lowing buttons and displays:
1. Scrolling functions menu but-
tons.
III 2. Function indicators: clock, tem-
perature, operating time, pro-
grammed time, heater operation,
heating management symbols.
3. Digital displays: time, tempera-
ture, duration of operation, pro-
grammed time or level of heating.
4. Off button.
5. On button. Press the buttons 1 in succession to
display the functions.
The first press of the left-hand or
right-hand button displays the time.
The programmable heating operates Displays on the remote Next, the left-hand button permits
independently of the engine. control screen access to the programming time then
to the level of heating (C1 to C5).
When the engine is off, it pre-heats
the coolant circuit in order to benefit The right-hand button permits ac-
from an optimum engine operating cess to the passenger compartment
temperature from the time the en- temperature then to the duration of
gine is switched on. operation of the heater if it is to be
switched on immediately.
The programmable heating system
is switched on using the long range
remote control. Activation can be im-
mediate or deferred by means of a
programming function.

The passenger compartment tem-

If a malfunction of the program- perature information is only avail-
mable heating system occurs, able when the engine is off.
contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
56
 COMFORT

Setting the time Immediate activation Setting the duration of

operation

III

Once the time has been displayed, Press button 5 (ON) until the mes- Press the buttons 1 to display the
by means of the buttons 1, press sage "OK" appears. duration of operation.
buttons 4 and 5 simultaneously with- When the signal has been received,
in 10 seconds. This symbol is displayed.
the message "OK" is displayed
along with the duration of operation.
This symbol flashes.
Once the duration of operation has
The heater starts and this been displayed, press buttons 4 and 5
symbol is displayed. simultaneously within 10 seconds.
Set the time using the buttons 1.
Press buttons 4 and 5 simultane- To deactivate the function, press This symbol flashes.
ously to save it. button 4 (OFF) until the message
"OK" appears.
This symbol is displayed (fixed). Set the duration by pressing the
buttons 1 (adjustment in steps of
This symbol is switched off. 10 mins and max value 30 mins).
Press buttons 4 and 5 simultaneous-
ly to save the duration of operation.
When carrying out these opera- This symbol is displayed (fixed).
tions, if the message "FAIL" ap-
pears, the signal has not been
received. Repeat the procedure
after changing your location.
The factory setting value is 30 minutes.
57
 COMFORT

Programming the heating Activation - deactivation Switching off the heating

Once the programming time has Press button 5 (ON).
You must programme your depar- been displayed by means of the but-
ture time in order for the system to tons 1, press button 5 (ON) until the
calculate the optimum heater start The symbol "HTM" remains
message "OK" appears. on.
time automatically.

III When the signal has been received,

the message "OK" is displayed Changing the level of heating
along with the symbol "HTM". The system offers 5 levels of heat-
ing (from the lowest level C1 to the
This symbol is displayed highest level C5).
when the heater starts.
Once the level of heating has been
displayed by means of the buttons 1,
press buttons 4 and 5 simultane-
ously.
HTM: Heat Thermo Management.
The letter "C" flashes.
Set the level of heating by pressing
Programming the departure time the buttons 1.
To deactivate the programming,
Press the buttons 1 to display the press button 4 (OFF) until the mes- Press buttons 4 and 5 simultane-
programming time. sage "OK" appears. ously to save the level selected. The
letter "C" is displayed (fixed).
This symbol is displayed. The symbol "HTM" is switched
off.

Once the programming time has been

displayed, press buttons 4 and 5 si-
multaneously within 10 seconds.
When carrying out these opera-
This symbol flashes. tions, if the message "FAIL" ap- The factory pre-sets are replaced
pears, the signal has not been by the new settings entered. The
received. Repeat the procedure programmed times are stored until
after changing your location. the next time they are changed.
Set the time by pressing the buttons 1
and press buttons 4 and 5 simultane- When the departure time is acti-
ously to save it. vated, the level of heating cannot
be changed. The departure time
This symbol is displayed (fixed). must be deactivated first.

58
 COMFORT

Changing the battery

The remote control is supplied by a
6V-28L battery, which is supplied.
!
Information on the display indicates
when it is time to replace this battery.
Unclip the casing then replace the Always switch off the program-
battery. mable heating while filling with
fuel to avoid any risk of fire or ex- III
The remote control must then be re- plosion.
initialised, see below.
To avoid any risk of poisoning and
asphyxiation, the programmable
Do not discard the used batter- heating must not be used, even
ies, take them to an approved for short periods, in an enclosed
collection point. space such as a garage or work-
shop which is not equipped with
an exhaust gas extraction system.
Reinitialising the remote control
Do not park the vehicle on an
If the vehicle's battery is disconnect- inflammable surface (dry grass,
ed or the remote control's battery is dead leaves, paper…), there is a
replaced, the remote control must risk of fire.
be reinitialised.
The programmable heating sys-
After switching on the power, press tem is supplied by the vehicle's fuel
button 4 (OFF) for 1 second within tank. Before use, ensure that the
the next 5 seconds. If the operation quantity of fuel remaining is suf-
has taken place correctly the mes- ficient. If the fuel tank is at the re-
sage "OK" is displayed on the re- serve, we strongly advise that you
mote control screen. do not programme the heating.
If a problem occurs, the message
"FAIL" appears. Repeat the opera-
tion. The interior volumetric protection
alarm movement sensor may be
disturbed by the flow of air from
the programmable heating when
it is in operation.
An adaptation of your programma- To avoid any unexpected trigger-
ble heating allows you to pre-heat ing of the alarm during use of the
your vehicle's passenger compart- programmable heating, it is ad-
ment. Contact a CITROËN dealer visable to deactivate the interior
or a qualified workshop. volumetric protection.
59
 COMFORT

FRONT SEATS MANUAL ADJUSTMENTS

Seat consisting of a seat cushion, seat back and head restraint which can all be 1. Adjustments to the height and
adjusted for optimum driving comfort. angle of the head restraint
To raise it, pull upwards.
To lower it, press on the control A
to unlock it, and simultaneously
III on the head restraint itself. The
adjustment is correct when the
top edge of the head restraint
is at the same height as the top
of the head. It is also tilt adjust-
able.
To raise it, press control A to
unlock it, then pull it upwards. It
may be necessary to adjust the
backrest angle.
2. Adjustment of the backrest
angle
Operate the control and adjust
the position of the backrest to
the front or to the rear.
3. Adjustment of the seat height
Raise or lower the control the
number of times required to ob-
tain the desired position.
4. Longitudinal adjustment of
seat
Lift the control bar and adjust to
the desired position.
5. Adjustment of lumbar support
Turn the control and adjust to the
desired position.
For your safety, do not drive with 6. Heated seat controls
the head restraints removed; they The heated seats only operate
must be in place and correctly ad- when the engine is running.
justed.
60
 COMFORT

FRONT SEATS 4. Adjustment of lumbar support

This function allows you to inde-
pendently adjust the height and
level of lumbar support.
Move the control:
) Forwards or backwards to in-
crease or reduce the lumbar III
support.
) Upwards or downwards to raise or
lower the lumbar support zone.

Head restraint height and

angle adjustments on electric
seats

ELECTRIC ADJUSTMENTS
To adjust the electric seats, switch on the ignition or start the engine if the ve-
hicle has gone into economy mode.
Seat adjustments are also possible for a short period after opening one of the
front doors or switching off the ignition. ) To adjust the angle of the head
1. Adjustment of the seat height 2. Adjustment of the backrest restraint, push back or pull for-
and angle, and longitudinal angle ward section C of the head re-
adjustment Move the control forwards or straint until you reach the desired
) Raise or lower the front of the backwards to adjust the backrest position.
control to adjust the seat cush- angle. ) To raise it, pull upwards.
ion angle. 3. Adjustment of the angle of the ) To lower it, press on the control D
) Raise or lower the rear of the top of the backrest to unlock it, and simultaneously
control to raise or lower the seat. Move the control forwards or on the head restraint itself.
) Simultaneously raise or lower backwards to adjust the angle of ) To remove it, press on the
the front and rear of the control the top of the backrest. control D to unlock it, then pull it
in order to raise or lower the upwards.
entire seat. 61
 COMFORT

Heated seats control Massage function Welcome function

The welcome function assists entry
With the engine running, the front and leaving the vehicle.
seats can operate separately. After switching off the ignition and
) Use the corresponding adjust- opening the driver’s door, the seat
ment dial, placed on the outer moves back automatically and then
III side of each front seat, to switch stays in this position, ready for the
on and select the level of heating next entry to the vehicle.
required: When switching on the ignition, the
seat moves forward to the memo-
rised driving position.
0: Off. When moving the seat, take care
1: Low. that no person or object hinders the
2: Medium. automatic movement of the seat.
This function provides the driver This function is deactivated by de-
3: High. with a back massage. It only oper- fault. You may activate or deactivate
ates when the engine is running. this function using the "Main Menu"
) Press on button A. on the instrument panel screen. To
The warning lamp comes on and the do so, select "Vehicle parameters/
massage function is activated for a Comfort/Driver welcome".
period of 1 hour. During this time,
massage is performed in cycles of
6 minutes (4 minutes of massage fol-
lowed by 2 minutes break). In total,
the system will perform 10 cycles.
After 1 hour, the function is deacti-
vated. The warning lamp goes out.

Deactivation
You can deactivate the massage
function at any time by pressing on
button A.

62
 COMFORT

Storing driving positions Storing a position REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS

Using buttons M / 1 / 2
) Switch on the ignition.
) Adjust your seat.
) Press button M, then press but-
ton 1 or 2 within four seconds.
An audible signal confirms that
III
the settings have been stored.
Storing a new position cancels the
previous position.

System which stores the settings of The rear head restraints can be re-
the driver's seat. Up to two positions moved and have two positions:
can be stored using the buttons on - high, position for use,
the side of the driver's seat. For your safety, avoid storing a
driving position while driving. - low, storage position.
When storing a driving position, the To raise a head restraint, pull it up-
air conditioning settings are also wards.
memorised. To lower it, press the lug then the
head restraint.
Recalling a stored position To remove it, place it in the high
position, push the lug and pull it up-
Ignition on or engine running wards.
To adjust the air conditioning, refer ) Briefly press button 1 or 2 to re- To refit it, engage the head restraint
to the "Air conditioning" section. call the corresponding position. rods in the holes taking care to re-
main in line with the seat back.
An audible signal indicates the end
of the adjustment.
When the ignition is on, after a few
consecutive position recalls, the
function will be deactivated until the Never drive with the head restraints
engine is started, to prevent dis- removed, they must be in place
charging of the battery. and correctly adjusted.

63
 COMFORT

REAR SEATS Refitting the seat cushion Returning the seat back to its
original position
) Position the seat cushion 1 verti-
cally in its fixings. When returning the rear seat to its
original position:
) Fold down the seat cushion 1.
) put the seat back 2 in the upright
) Press on the seat cushion to se- position and secure it,
cure it.
III ) fold the seat cushion 1,
) refit the head restraints or put
them back in place.
When returning the rear seat to its
Folding the seat original position, take care not to trap
the seat belts and ensure that their
In order to fold a rear seat without buckles are positioned correctly.
any risk of damage, always start
with the seat cushion, never with
the seat back:
Bench seat, the left-hand (2/3) or ) move the corresponding front
right-hand (1/3) section of which seat forwards if necessary,
can be folded to adapt the boot load ) raise the front of the seat cush-
space. ion 1,
) tilt the seat cushion 1 fully against
the front seat,
Removing the seat cushion ) check that the seat belt is posi-
) Move the corresponding front tioned correctly on the side of
seat forwards if necessary. the seat back,
) Raise the front of the seat cush- ) lower or remove the head re-
ion 1. straints if necessary,
) Tilt the seat cushion 1 fully ) pull the control 3 forwards to re-
against the front seat. lease the seat back 2,
) Remove the seat cushion 1 from ) tilt the seat back 2. The red indicator on the control 3
its fixings by pulling upwards. The seat cushion 1 can be removed should no longer be visible; if it is,
to increase the loading volume. push the seat fully back.

64
 COMFORT

MIRRORS Rear view mirror

The objects observed are, in real-
ity, closer than they appear. Adjustable mirror providing a central
Take this into account in order to rearward view.
correctly judge the distance of ve- Equipped with an anti-dazzle sys-
hicles approaching from behind. tem, which darkens the mirror glass
and reduces the nuisance to the
Demisting/defrosting of the door driver caused by the sun, headlam- III
mirrors is associated with that of ps from other vehicles...
the rear screen.

As a safety measure, the mirrors

Folding should be adjusted to reduce the
) from outside; lock the vehicle "blind spot".
using the remote control or the
Door mirrors key.
Manual day/night model
Each fitted with an adjustable mirror ) from inside; with the ignition on,
glasses providing the lateral rear- pull control A rearwards.
ward vision necessary for overtaking If the mirrors are folded using
or parking. They can also be folded. control A, they will not unfold when
the vehicle is unlocked. Control A
must be pulled again.

Unfolding
Adjustment ) from outside; unlock the vehicle
With the ignition on: using the remote control or the
key.
) move control A to the right or to
the left to select the correspond- ) from inside; with the ignition on,
ing mirror, pull control A rearwards.
Adjustment
) move control B in all four direc- If the position is changed manually,
tions to adjust, a long press on control A re-engages ) Adjust the mirror so that the glass is
the mirror. directed correctly in the "day" position.
) return control A to the central po-
sition. The folding and unfolding of the door Day / night position
mirrors using the remote control can
be deactivated by a CITROËN deal- ) Pull the lever to change to the
er or a qualified workshop. "night" anti-dazzle position.
) Push the lever to change to the
normal "day" position.
65
 COMFORT

Automatic day/night model STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT

The steering wheel can be adjusted
for height and reach to adapt the
driving position to the size of the
driver.

III

By means of a sensor, which mea- In vehicles fitted with electrochro-

sures the light from the rear of the matic door mirrors, the system has
vehicle, this system automatically an on/off button and an associated
and progressively changes between warning lamp.
the day and night uses.
Adjustment
It has an anti-dazzle system which
darkens the mirror glass: this reduc- ) First, adjust the driver's seat to
es any driver discomfort caused by On the most suitable position.
the light beam of following vehicles, ) With the ignition on, press on ) When stationary, pull the lever A
the sun... button 1. to unlock the steering wheel ad-
The warning lamp 2 comes on and the justment.
mirror glass is in automatic mode. ) Adjust for height and reach.
) Push the lever to lock the steering
In order to guarantee optimum visi- wheel adjustment.
bility during your manoeuvres, the Off
mirror lightens automatically when After locking, if you press firmly on
) Press on button 1. the steering wheel, a slight click may
reverse gear is engaged.
The warning lamp 2 goes off and the be heard.
mirror glass remains in its lightest
definition.
As a safety precaution, these ope-
rations must only be carried out
while the vehicle is stationary.
66
 ACCESS

REMOTE CONTROL KEY Complete unlocking using the Each unlocking is confirmed by
remote control rapid flashing of the direction indica-
System which permits central tors for approximately two seconds
unlocking or locking of the vehicle ) Press the open padlock and by switching on of the courtesy
using the lock or from a distance. It to unlock the vehicle. lamp.
is also used to locate and start the
vehicle and provide guide-me-home
lighting, as well as providing protec- According to version, the exterior
tion against theft. mirrors unfold at the same time as
Complete unlocking using the first unlocking action.
the key IV
Unlocking the vehicle ) Turn the key to the left in the
driver's door lock to unlock the
vehicle. The complete or selective unlocking
Unlocking is confirmed by rapid parameter is set via the instrument
flashing of the direction indicators panel screen configuration menu
for approximately two seconds and (see "Instruments and controls" sec-
lighting of the courtesy lamp (if the tion).
function is activated).
According to version, the door mir-
rors unfold at the same time. Complete unlocking is activated by
default.

Selective unlocking using

the remote control
Selective unlocking is not possible
) Press the open pad- using the key.
lock once to unlock the
driver's door only.

Unfolding the key ) Press the open padlock again to Electric boot opening
) First press button A to unfold the unlock the other doors and the
boot. ) Press button B to open
key. the boot.

67
 ACCESS

Locking the vehicle Deadlocking using the key

If one of the doors, the rear screen ) Turn the key to the right in the driv-
Normal locking using the remote or the boot is still open, the central er's door lock to lock the vehicle
control locking does not take place. completely and hold it in this posi-
) Press the closed pad- When the vehicle is locked, if it is un- tion for more than two seconds to
lock to lock the vehicle locked inadvertently, it will lock again close the windows automatically in
completely. automatically after thirty seconds un- addition to locking.
less a door is opened. ) Turn the key to the right again
When stationary with the engine within five seconds to deadlock
IV ) Press the closed padlock for off, locking is confirmed by flashing the vehicle.
more than two seconds to close of the interior locking control indi- Deadlocking is confirmed by fixed
the windows and sunroof auto- cator lamp. lighting of the direction indicators for
matically in addition to locking. The folding and unfolding of the approximately two seconds.
door mirrors using the remote According to version, the exterior
control can be deactivated by a mirrors fold at the same time.
CITROËN dealer or a qualified
Normal locking using the key workshop.
) Turn the key to the right in the
driver's door lock to lock the ve-
hicle completely.
Locking is confirmed by fixed light-
ing of the direction indicators for ap-
proximately two seconds and by the Deadlocking using the Deadlocking renders the exterior
courtesy lamp going off. and interior door controls inopera-
remote control tive.
According to version, the door mir-
rors fold at the same time. ) Press the closed pad- It also deactivates the manual cen-
lock to lock the vehicle tral control button.
completely or press the When stationary with the engine
closed padlock for more off, locking is confirmed by flashing
than two seconds to of the indicator lamp on the interior
close the windows and locking control.
sunroof automatically in If one of the doors or the boot is
addition to locking. open or has not been closed cor-
) Press the closed padlock again rectly, the central locking will not
within five seconds to deadlock work.
the vehicle. Therefore, never leave anyone in-
side the vehicle when it is dead-
locked.
68
 ACCESS

Folding the key Guide-me-home lighting Anti-theft protection

A press on button B oper- Electronic engine immobiliser
ates the guide-me-home The key contains an electronic chip
lighting (lighting of the side- which has a special code. When the
lamps, dipped beams and ignition is switched on, this code
number plate lamps). must be recognised in order for
A second press before the end of starting to be possible.
the timing cancels the guide-me- This electronic engine immobiliser
home lighting. locks the engine management sys-
The timed duration can be set via the tem a few minutes after the ignition IV
"Lighting" menu on the "Main Menu" is switched off and prevents starting
of the instrument panel screen. of the engine by anyone who does
not have the key.
) First press button A to fold the
key. In the event of a fault,
you are informed by il-
lumination of this warn-
ing lamp, an audible
Locating your vehicle signal and a message in the screen.
In this case, your vehicle will not
) Press the closed padlock to lo- start; contact a CITROËN dealer as
cate your locked vehicle in a car soon as possible.
park.
Keep safely the label attached to the
This is indicated by switching on keys given to you on acquisition of
of the interior lighting and flashing the vehicle.
of the direction indicators for a few
seconds.
The vehicle remains locked.

69
 ACCESS

IGNITION SWITCH Steering lock STOPPING

1. "S": After removing the key, turn
the steering wheel to lock the steer- Vehicles equipped with a
ing. The key can only be removed in turbocharger
position S.
Never stop the engine without having
2. "M": Ignition switched on, the allowed it to run for a few seconds at
steering is unlocked (by turning the idle, this being the time required for
key to position M, move the steering the turbocharger to return to a normal
wheel gently if necessary). speed.
IV 3. "D": Starter position.
Never turn the key to this position
when the engine is running.
Do not flick the accelerator at the
moment of switching off the ignition.
This could cause serious damage
to the turbocharger(s).

1. "S": Steering lock

To unlock the steering, gently move
the steering wheel while turning the
key, without forcing it.
2. "M": Drive position Do not run the engine in an
enclosed space or where there is
Depending on the version of your insufficient ventilation.
vehicle, the orange and red warn- It is essential always to drive with
ing lamps should also come on for the engine running in order to re-
a short time. tain braking and steering assis-
tance.
3. "D": Starter Never remove the ignition key
Release the key as soon the engine before the vehicle has come to a
has started. complete stop.
If the first attempt fails, switch off the Avoid attaching a heavy object to
ignition. Wait ten seconds then ope- the key which would weigh down
rate the starter again. on its shaft in the switch and could
cause a malfunction.
70
 ACCESS

Operating problem Changing the battery

Following disconnection of the ve-
hicle battery, replacement of the re-
mote control battery or in the event
of a remote control fault, you can no
longer unlock, lock or locate your
vehicle.
) First of all, use the key in the lock
to unlock or lock your vehicle.
) Then, reinitialise the remote con- IV
trol.
If the problem persists, contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified work-
shop as soon as possible.
Battery ref.: CR0523 / 3 volts.
This replacement battery is avail-
Reinitialisation able from CITROËN dealers or a
) Switch off the ignition. qualified workshop.
) Turn the key to position 2 (Drive).
If the battery is flat,
) Press the closed padlock imme- you are informed by
diately for a few seconds, until illumination of this
the operation requested is trig- warning lamp, an au-
gered. dible signal and a message in the
) Switch off the ignition and re- multifunction screen.
move the key from the ignition
switch. ) Unclip the casing using a coin at
The remote control is fully opera- the notch.
tional again. ) Slide the flat battery out of its lo-
cation.
) Slide the new battery into its
location observing the original
direction.
) Clip the casing.
) Reinitialise the remote control.

71
 ACCESS

Lost keys Locking the vehicle Do not throw the remote con-
trol batteries away, they contain
Visit a CITROËN dealer with the ve- Driving with the doors locked may metals which are harmful to the
hicle's registration document, your make access to the passenger com- environment.
personal identification documents partment by the emergency services Take them to an approved collection
and if possible the key code label. more difficult in an emergency. point.
The CITROËN dealer will be able to However, the vehicle unlocks auto-
look up the key code and the tran- matically in the event of a serious
sponder code required to order a impact causing airbag deployment.
new key.
IV As a safety precaution (with children
on board), remove the key from the
ignition switch when you leave the
vehicle, even for a short time.
Remote control
The high frequency remote control
is a sensitive system; do not operate Anti-theft protection
it while it is in your pocket as there
is a possibility that it may unlock the Do not make any modifications to
vehicle, without you being aware the electronic engine immobiliser
of it. system; this could cause malfunc-
Do not repeatedly press the buttons tions.
of your remote control out of range
and out of sight of your vehicle. You
run the risk of stopping it from work- When purchasing a second-
ing and the remote control would
have to be reinitialised. hand vehicle
The remote control does not operate Have the pairing of all of the keys
when the key is in the ignition switch, in your possession checked by a
even when the ignition is switched CITROËN dealer, to ensure that
off, except for reinitialisation. only your keys can be used to open
and start the vehicle.

72
 ACCESS

ALARM* Locking the vehicle with full Deactivation

alarm system ) Press the unlocking button on
System which protects and provides the remote control.
a deterrent against theft and break-
ins. It provides the following types of The alarm system is deactivated: the
monitoring. indicator lamp in the button goes off.
- exterior perimeter Locking the vehicle with
The system checks for opening of exterior perimeter monitoring
the vehicle. only
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries
to open a door, the boot, the bonnet... Deactivate the interior volumetric IV
and anti-tilt monitoring to avoid un-
wanted triggering of the alarm in
- interior volumetric certain cases such as:
The system checks for any variation - leaving a pet in the vehicle,
in the volume in the passenger com- - leaving a window partially open,
partment. Activation - washing your vehicle,
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks ) Switch off the ignition and get out - changing a wheel,
a window, enters the passenger com- of the vehicle.
partment or moves inside the vehicle. - having your vehicle towed,
) Press the locking button on the
remote control. - transport by sea.
- tilt
The system checks for any change The monitoring system is active: the
in the attitude of the vehicle. indicator lamp in the button flashes Deactivation of the interior
once per second. volumetric and anti-tilt
The alarm is triggered if the vehicle monitoring
is lifted, moved or knocked. After the locking button on the re-
mote control is pressed, the exterior ) Switch off the ignition.
Self-protection function perimeter monitoring is activated ) Within ten seconds, press the
! The system checks for the
after a delay of 5 seconds and the
interior volumetric and anti-tilt moni-
button until the indicator lamp is
putting out of service of its on continuously.
toring after a delay of 45 seconds.
components. ) Get out of the vehicle.
If an opening (door, boot...) is not
The alarm is triggered if the bat- closed fully, the vehicle is not locked ) Press the locking button on the
tery, the central control or the si- but the exterior perimeter monitor- remote control immediately.
ren wiring are put out of service or ing will be activated after a delay of The exterior perimeter monitoring
damaged. 45 seconds at the same time as the alone is activated: the indicator lamp in
For all work on the alarm system, interior volumetric and anti-tilt moni- the button flashes once per second.
contact a CITROËN dealer or a toring. To be effective, this deactivation
qualified workshop. must be carried out each time the
* According to country. ignition is switched off.
73
 ACCESS

Triggering of the alarm Locking the vehicle without

activating the alarm
This is indicated by sounding of the
siren and flashing of the direction in- ) Lock or deadlock the vehicle us-
dicators for thirty seconds. ing the key in the driver's door
The monitoring functions remain lock.
active until the alarm has been trig-
gered eleven times in succession.
When the vehicle is unlocked using Operating fault
the remote control, rapid flashing of
IV the indicator lamp in the button in- When the ignition is switched on,
forms you that the alarm was trig- fixed illumination of the indicator
gered during your absence. When lamp in the button indicates a fault
the ignition is switched on, this flash- with the system.
Reactivation of the interior ing stops immediately. Have it checked by a CITROËN
volumetric and anti-tilt dealer or a qualified workshop.
monitoring
) Press the unlocking button on the
remote control to deactivate the Failure of the remote control Automatic activation*
exterior perimeter monitoring. To deactivate the monitoring func- 2 minutes after closing the last door
) Press the locking button on the tions: or the boot, the system is activated
remote control to activate all the automatically.
monitoring functions. ) unlock the vehicle using the key
in the driver's door lock, ) To avoid triggering the alarm
The indicator lamp in the button when entering the vehicle, first
again flashes once per second. ) open the door; the alarm is trig-
gered, press the remote control unlock-
ing button.
) switch on the ignition; the alarm
stops; the indicator lamp in the
button goes off.

* Depending on country of sale.

74
 ACCESS

ELECTRIC WINDOWS One-touch electric windows Safety anti-pinch

When the window rises and meets
There are two options: an obstacle, it stops and partially
- manual mode lowers again.
) Press or pull the control gently.
The window stops when the
control is released.
If the window cannot be closed (for
example, in the presence of ice),
immediately after the movement is
reversed:
IV
) press and hold the control until
- automatic mode the window opens fully,
1. Driver's electric window control.
) Press or pull the control firmly. ) then pull the control immediate-
2. Passenger's electric window The window opens or closes ly and hold it until the window
control. fully when the control is re- closes,
3. Rear right electric window leased. ) continue to hold the control for
control. approximately one second after
) Pressing the control again
4. Rear left electric window control. stops the movement of the the window has closed.
5. Deactivation of the rear electric window. The safety anti-pinch function is
window and door controls. not operational during these opera-
tions.

The electric window controls re-

main operational for approximate-
ly 45 seconds after the ignition is
switched off or until the vehicle is
locked after a door is opened.
If one of the passenger windows
cannot be operated from the driver's
door control panel, carry out the op-
eration from the control panel of the
passenger door concerned, and vice
versa.

75
 ACCESS

Reinitialisation Deactivation of the rear This control also deactivates the inte-
If a window does not rise automati- electric window and door rior controls for the rear doors (refer
cally, its operation must be reini- controls to the section "Child safety - § Elec-
tialised: tric child lock").
) pull the control until the window Any other status of the indicator
stops, lamp indicates a fault with the elec-
tric child lock.
) release the control and pull it
again until the window closes Have it checked by a CITROËN
fully, dealer or a qualified workshop.

IV ) continue to hold the control for

approximately one second after
the window has closed,
) press the control to lower the
window automatically to the low
position,
) when the window has reached ) For the safety of your children,
the low position, press the con- press control 5 to deactivate the
trol again for approximately one rear electric window controls re-
second. gardless of their position.
The safety anti-pinch function is Indicator lamp on, the rear controls Always remove the key from the
not operational during these opera- are deactivated. ignition when leaving the vehicle,
tions. Indicator lamp off, the rear controls even for a short time.
are activated. If an obstacle is encountered during
operation of the electric windows,
you must reverse the movement of
A message in the instrument panel the window. To do this, press the
screen informs you of the activa- control concerned.
tion / deactivation of the control. When the driver operates the con-
trols for the passengers' electric
windows, they must ensure that no
one is preventing correct closing of
the windows.
The driver must ensure that the
passengers use the electric win-
dows correctly.
Be aware of children when opera-
ting the windows.

76
 ACCESS

DOORS From inside Manual centralised control

Opening System which provides full manual

locking or unlocking of the doors
and boot from the inside.
From outside

IV

) Pull the interior control lever of

a front door; this unlocks the ve-
hicle completely.

) After unlocking the vehicle com-

pletely using the remote control
or the key, pull the door handle.
Locking
) Press button A to lock the vehicle.
The red indicator lamp on the button
comes on. It flashes when the doors
are locked while stationary with the
With the selective unlocking acti- engine off.
When the selective unlocking is ac- vated:
tivated, the first press of the remote - the driver's door control unlocks
control unlocking button permits the driver's door only,
unlocking of the driver's door only.
- the other door controls unlock
the other doors and the boot.
The interior door controls do not
operate when the vehicle is dead- If one of the doors is open, the cen-
locked. tral locking from the inside does not
take place.

77
 ACCESS

Unlocking Locking Emergency control

) Press button A again to unlock When the speed exceeds 6 mph
the vehicle. (10 km/h), the doors and the boot System allowing the doors to be
lock automatically. locked and unlocked manually in the
The red indicator lamp on the button event of a malfunction of the central
switches off. If one of the doors is open, the auto- locking system or battery failure.
matic central locking does not take
place.
If the vehicle is locked or dead- If the boot is open, the automatic
locked from the outside, the red in- central locking of the doors is ac- Locking the driver's door
dicator lamp flashes and button A tive. ) Insert the key in the door lock,
IV is inactive. then turn it to the rear.
Unlocking
) In this case, use the remote You can also apply the procedure
control or the key to unlock the ) Above 6 mph (10 km/h), press described for the passenger doors.
vehicle. button A to unlock the doors and
the boot temporarily.

Automatic central locking Activation Unlocking the driver's door

System which provides full automat- ) Press button A for more than ) Insert the key in the door lock,
ic locking or unlocking of the doors two seconds. then turn it to the front.
and the boot while driving. A confirmation message appears on
You can activate or deactivate this the instrument panel screen, accom-
function. panied by an audible signal.

Deactivation
) Press button A again for more
than two seconds.
A confirmation message appears on
the instrument panel screen, accom-
panied by an audible signal.

78
 ACCESS

Locking the front and rear BOOT (SALOON) Emergency boot release
passenger doors
Opening System for mechanical unlocking of
the boot in the event of a battery or
central locking malfunction.

IV

) Open the doors.

) On the rear doors, check that
the child lock is not on (see Child
Safety).
) Remove the black cap, located ) Press upwards on lever 1 and lift
on the edge of the door, using up the boot lid.
the key.
) Insert the key in the socket with-
out forcing it, then without turn- Locking/unlocking Unlocking
ing it, move the latch sideways ) Fold back the rear seats to gain
towards the inside of the door. With the vehicle stationary, this is access to the lock from inside
) Remove the key and refit the carried out using: the boot.
cap. - The remote control. ) Insert a small screwdriver into
) Close the doors and check that - The key in a door lock. hole A of the lock to unlock the
the vehicle has locked correctly tailgate.
from the outside. - The interior central locking/ un-
locking control. ) Push the white part, located in-
side the lock, to the left to unlock
Unlocking the front and rear the boot.
passenger doors The boot automatically locks when
the vehicle is moving at a speed of
) Pull the interior door opening over 6 mph (10 km/h), even if auto-
control. matic central locking is deactivated.
It is unlocked when a door is opened
or when the central locking button is
pressed (speed lower than 6 mph
(10 km/h)).
79
 ACCESS

BOOT (TOURER) The boot automatically locks when

Do not attempt to help the opening the vehicle is moving at a speed of
Manual opening of the tailgate manually after press- over 6 mph (10 km/h), even if auto-
ing the control A. matic central locking is deactivated.
It is unlocked when a door is opened
or when the central locking button
is pressed (at a speed of less than
Manual closing 6 mph (10 km/h)).
) Lower the tailgate using the inte-
rior handle C. Interrupting the opening /
IV closing of the tailgate
Electric closing When the tailgate is being opened or
closed electrically, you can interrupt
) Press the push-button D to close its movement at any point by press-
the tailgate. ing push-button D, the control A or
button B.
) Press upwards on lever A and lift
up the tailgate. You can then open or close the tail-
gate electrically or manually, if neces-
Do not interrupt the closing of the sary moving it in the opposite direction
tailgate; if any obstacle prevents it to release it.
Electric opening
closing, the operation will stop and
the tailgate will automatically rise
by a few centimetres.

Memorisation of an
Locking/unlocking intermediate position
With the vehicle stationary, this is You can store an opening angle for
carried out using: the tailgate:
- The remote control. ) Manually or automatically move
- The key in a door lock. the tailgate to the required posi-
- The interior central locking/ un- tion.
locking control. ) Make a long press on push-but-
ton D. The system emits a short
) Press upwards on lever A, or audible beep.
press button B of the remote
control. ) Release the push-button D.

80
 ACCESS

Cancelling the memorisation

With the tailgate in the intermediate
position, you can cancel the stored To avoid risk of injury, make sure
position: that no one is in the vicinity of the
) Make a long press on push- boot while opening and closing.
button D. The system emits a If the tailgate is carrying extra
long audible beep. weight (snow, bicycle carrier, etc.)
) Release the push-button D. The there is a risk of it closing under
tailgate will return to the fully this load. Support the tailgate or
open position at the next use. first unload the bicycle carrier or IV
clear the snow.
When using an automatic car wash,
don’t forget to lock the vehicle so
as to avoid any risk of motorised
opening of the tailgate.

Electrical protection of the

motor
If the tailgate is repeatedly opened
and closed in quick succession, the
motor can start to overheat and then
cut out, preventing opening and
closing of the tailgate.
Allow the motor to cool down for ten
minutes without opening or closing
the tailgate.
Closing in manual back-up mode re-
mains possible.

81
 ACCESS

PANORAMIC SUNROOF Sunroof open Reinitialisation

(SALOON) - Press B to first notch: closure.
After a battery disconnection or if
- Press B to second notch: auto- there has been a malfunction, you
Operation matic total closure. have to re-initialise the anti-pinch
function.
) move control B until the roof is in
the complete tilting position,
Tilted sunroof
) keep control B pressed down for
- Press A to first notch: closure. a minimum of 1 second.
IV - Press A to second notch: auto- During these operations, the anti-
matic total closure. pinch function does not operate.

Always remove the ignition key

when leaving the vehicle, even if
Sunroof closed for a short time.
- Press B to first notch: tilting. In the event of anything being
- Press B to second notch: auto- caught by the sunroof closing, you
matic complete tilting. must reverse the roof movement.
- Press A to first notch: sliding to- Do this by reversing the position of
wards rear. Your sun roof is fitted with a manually- the control switch.
- Press A to second notch: auto- operated blind. When the driver is operating the
matic total sliding towards rear. sunroof, they must always make
sure that the passengers are not
preventing it from closing properly.
The driver must ensure that pas-
Anti-pinch sengers use the sunroof control
An anti-pinch device stops the sun correctly.
roof from closing, whether sliding or Pay special attention to where chil-
tilting. If it meets an obstacle, it re- dren are when operating the sun oof.
opens. The fitting of a sunroof as an ac-
cessory is prohibited

82
 ACCESS

PANORAMIC SUNROOF Opening After a battery disconnection, or if

(TOURER) there has been a malfunction, you
) Press control A. have to re-initialise the anti-pinch
Pressing to the 1st notch allows you function:
to open the blind step by step. ) press control B to the 2nd notch
Pressing to the 2nd notch allows (fully closed),
you to fully open the blind. ) wait until the blind is fully
The blind stops in the closest pre- closed,
defined position (11 positions) as ) press control B for at least
soon as you release the control. 3 seconds.
If the blind opens randomly during a
IV
closing operation, and straight after
Closing the blind stops:
) Press control B until the blind
) Press control B. closes fully.
Press to the first notch to close the During these operations, the anti-
This comprises a tinted glass pan- blind step by step. pinch function does not operate.
oramic area 1 to improve brightness Press to the second notch to close
and vision in the passenger com- the blind completely.
partment. The blind stops at the nearest pre-
It is fitted with an electric blind 2 to set position (11 positions) as soon
help maintain a comfortable temper- as you release the control.
ature and reduce noise.
In the event of anything being
Anti-pinch caught when the blind is moving,
SEQUENTIAL ELECTRIC you must reverse the movement of
BLIND If the blind meets an obstacle whilst the blind. To do so, reverse the po-
closing, it stops and opens partially sition of the control.
again. When the driver is operating the
You must re-initialise the anti-pinch blind, he or she must always make
function within 5 seconds of the sure that the passengers are not
blind stopping: preventing it from closing properly.
) press control B until the blind is The driver must ensure that pas-
fully closed (closing in steps of a sengers use the blind correctly.
few centimetres). Pay particular attention to children
when operating the blind.

83
 ACCESS

FUEL TANK Refuelling

Capacity of the tank: approxi-

mately 71 litres*.
Additions of fuel must be of at least
5 litres to be taken into account by
Low fuel level the fuel gauge.
When the minimum level The filler neck is narrower to ensure
in the tank is reached, this that only unleaded petrol nozzles
IV warning lamp comes on can be put in.
in the instrument panel, Opening the filler cap may create
accompanied by an audible warning a noise of an inrush of air. This
and a message on the multifunction vacuum, which is entirely normal,
screen. When it first comes on, there is caused by the sealing of the fuel
remains around 5 litres of fuel in the system.
tank. ) turn the key a quarter turn to lock
You must refuel to avoid running out and unlock the filler cap,
of fuel. ) when refuelling, place the cap on
hook A,
Opening the fuel flap ) fill the tank, but do not persist
after the third cut-off; this could With Stop & Start, never re-
cause your vehicle to malfunc-
tion.
! fuel with the system in STOP
mode; you must switch off
While you are refuelling, the engine the ignition with the key.
must be stopped and the ignition
switched off.
For a petrol engine with a cata-
lytic converter, unleaded fuel is
compulsory.

) Press at the top left corner, then

pull open from the left.
* 55 litres for Slovakia.
84
 ACCESS

MISFUEL PREVENTION Quality of the fuel used for Quality of the fuel used for
(DIESEL)* petrol engines Diesel engines
Mechanical device which prevents The petrol engines are perfectly The Diesel engines are perfectly
filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle compatible with E10 type petrol compatible with biofuels which con-
with petrol. It avoids the risk of en- biofuels (containing 10% ethanol), form to current and future European
gine damage that can result from fill- conforming to European standards standards (Diesel fuel which com-
ing with the wrong fuel. EN 228 and EN 15376. plies with standard EN 590 mixed
E85 type fuels (containing up to 85% with a biofuel which complies with
Located in the filler neck, the misfuel standard EN 14214) available at the
prevention device appears when the ethanol) are reserved exclusively for
vehicles marketed for the use of this pumps (containing up to 7 % Fatty
filler cap is removed.
type of fuel (BioFlex vehicles). The Acid Methyl Ester). IV
quality of the ethanol must comply The B30 biofuel can be used in cer-
with European standard EN 15293. tain Diesel engines; however, this
For Brazil only, special vehicles are use is subject to strict application
marketed to run on fuels containing of the special servicing conditions.
up to 100% ethanol (E100 type). Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
The use of any other type of (bio)fuel
(vegetable or animal oils, pure or di-
luted, domestic fuel...) is strictly pro-
hibited (risk of damage to the engine
and fuel system).
Operation
When a petrol filler nozzle is intro-
duced into the fuel filler neck of your
Diesel vehicle, it comes into contact Travelling abroad
with the flap. The system remains As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may
closed and prevents filling. be different in other countries, the
Do not persist but introduce a presence of the misfuel prevention
Diesel type filler nozzle. device may make refuelling impos-
sible.
It remains possible to use a fuel Before travelling abroad, we rec-
can to fill the tank. ommend that you check with the
In order to ensure a good flow of CITROËN dealer network, whether
fuel, do not place the nozzle of the your vehicle is suitable for the fuel
fuel can in direct contact with the pumps in the country in which you
flap of the misfuel prevention de- want to travel.
vice and pour slowly. * According to country of sale.
85
 VISIBILITY

EXTERIOR LIGHTING Settings A. Main lighting mode selection ring:

CONTROLS turn it to position the symbol re-
Various automatic lighting control quired facing the mark.
Control stalk for the selection and modes are also available depending
control of the various front and rear on options:
lamps providing the vehicle's lighting. - daytime running lamps,
- automatic illumination of headlamps, Lamps off.
Main lighting - directional lighting,
- guide-me-home lighting.
The various front and rear lamps of Automatic illumination of
the vehicle are designed to adapt headlamps.
the driver's visibility progressively in In some weather conditions (e.g. low
relation to the climatic conditions: temperature or humidity), the pre-
V - sidelamps, to be seen, sence of misting on the internal sur-
Sidelamps.
- dipped beam headlamps to see face of the glass of the headlamps
without dazzling other drivers, and rear lamps is normal; it disap-
- main beam headlamps to see pears after the lamps have been on Dipped headlamps or
clearly when the road is clear. for a few minutes. main beam headlamps.

Manual controls B. Stalk for switching headlamps: pull

the stalk towards you to switch the
lighting between dipped and main
beam headlamps.
Additional lighting In the lamps off and sidelamps
modes, the driver can switch on the
Other lamps are fitted to fulfil the re- main beam headlamps temporarily
quirements of particular driving con- ("headlamp flash") by maintaining a
ditions: pull on the stalk.
- a rear foglamp to be seen from a
distance,
- front foglamps for even better Displays
forward vision,
- directional headlamps for im- Illumination of the corresponding indicator
proved visibility when cornering, lamp in the instrument panel confirms that
The lighting is controlled directly by the lighting selected is on.
- daytime running lamps to be the driver by means of the ring A
seen during the day. and the stalk B.

86
 VISIBILITY

C. Foglamps selection ring.

The foglamps operate with the side-
lamps and the dipped and main
beam headlamps.
In good or rainy weather, both day
and night, use of the front foglamps
Model with rear Model with front and rear and the rear foglamps is prohibited.
foglamps only foglamps In these situations, the power of
their beams may dazzle other dri-
vers. They should only be used in
fog or falling snow.
In these weather conditions, it is
your responsibility to switch on the
foglamps and dipped headlamps
manually as the sunshine sensor V
may detect sufficient light.
Do not forget to switch off the front
and rear foglamps when they are
no longer needed.

- 1st turn forwards: rear foglamps on. - 1st turn forwards: front foglamps on.
- 1st turn rearwards: rear foglamps off. - 2nd turn forwards: rear foglamps on.
- 1st turn rearwards: rear foglamps off.
Lighting left on
- 2nd turn rearwards: front foglamps off.
When a front door is opened with
the ignition off and in manual light-
ing mode, an audible signal warns
the driver if the vehicle's lighting is
still on.
In this case, switching off the light-
ing stops the audible signal.
With the ignition off, if the dipped
headlamps remain on, they will
switch off automatically after thirty
minutes to prevent discharging of
the battery.

87
 VISIBILITY

Daytime-running lamps Manual guide-me-home Automatic illumination

lighting of headlamps
System which switches on special
lamps at the front, to make the vehi- The sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps
Temporarily keeping the dipped are switched on automatically, without any ac-
cle more visible by day. beam headlamps on after the vehi- tion on the part of the driver, when a low level
They light up automatically and perma- cle's ignition has been switched off of external light is detected or in certain cases
nently, when the engine is running, if: makes the driver's exit easier when of activation of the windscreen wipers.
- The function is activated* in the the light is poor.
As soon as the brightness returns to a suffi-
"Main Menu" of the instrument cient level or after the windscreen wipers are
panel screen. switched off, the lamps are switched off auto-
- The lighting control is at position 0 matically.
or AUTO.
- All the headlamps are off.
V You can deactivate* this function
using the "Main Menu" of the instru-
ment panel screen.

Switching on
) With the ignition off, "flash" the
headlamps using the lighting stalk.
) A further "headlamp flash" switches Activation
the function off. ) Turn ring A to the "AUTO" position.
The automatic illumination of head-
lamps is accompanied by a message
in the instrument panel screen.
Switching off
The manual guide-me-home lighting Deactivation
switches off automatically after a set ) Turn ring A to a position other
time. than "AUTO". Deactivation is
accompanied by a message in
the instrument panel screen.

* According to country.
88
 VISIBILITY

Linked with the automatic MANUAL HEADLAMP AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF

"Guide-me-home" lighting ADJUSTMENT DIRECTIONAL HEADLAMPS
The link with the automatic illumi-
nation of headlamps provides the
"guide-me-home" lighting with the
following additional options:
- selection of the duration of lighting
for 15, 30 or 60 seconds in the ve-
hicle parameters on the instrument
panel screen configuration menu,
- automatic activation of "guide-
me-home" lighting when auto-
matic illumination of headlamps
is in operation. V
To avoid dazzling other road users,
the height of the halogen bulb head-
Operating fault lamps must be adjusted according To avoid causing a nuisance to other
In the event of a fault with the sun- to the load in the vehicle. road users, this system corrects
shine sensor, the lighting comes 0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats. the height of the xenon headlamp
on and a message appears in the -. 3 people. beams automatically and when sta-
instrument panel screen, accompa- tionary, depending on the load in the
nied by an audible signal. 1. 5 people.
vehicle.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali- -. Intermediate setting.
fied workshop. 2. 5 people + maximum authorised If a fault occurs, this
loads. warning lamp comes
-. Intermediate setting. on in the instrument
panel, accompanied by
3. Driver + maximum authorised an audible signal and a
In fog or snow, the sunshine sen- loads.
sor may detect sufficient light. message in the instru-
Therefore, the lighting will not Initial setting is position "0". ment panel screen.
come on automatically. The system then places your head-
Do not cover the sunshine sen- lamps in the lowest position.
sor, linked with the rain sensor and
located in the centre of the wind-
screen behind the rear view mirror; Do not touch the xenon bulbs.
the associated functions would no Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
longer operate. qualified workshop.

89
 VISIBILITY

DIRECTIONAL Deactivation
LIGHTING This function is deactivated:
- below a certain angle of rotation
"Cornering lighting" function of the steering wheel,
With dipped or main beams, this - when stationary or at very low
function provides additional lighting speed,
for the inside of a bend, when the - when reverse gear is engaged,
vehicle speed is below 25 mph (ap- - when the directional headlamps
prox 40 km/h). are switched off.
This lighting is most useful when
travelling at low and medium speed
(urban driving, winding road, inter-
V sections, parking manoeuvres...).
without cornering lighting

Activation
This function is activated:
- when the direction indicator is
activated,
- from a certain angle of rotation of
the steering wheel.

with cornering lighting

90
 VISIBILITY

Directional headlamps Programming

function
The function is activated or deac-
When the dipped or main beam tivated via the instrument panel
headlamps are on, this function, as- screen "Main Menu".
sociated with the "cornering lighting" To do this, select "Vehicle parameters \
function, enables the light beam to Lighting \ Directional headlamps".
follow the direction of the road.
The use of this function, linked with
the xenon headlamps only, conside-
rably improves the quality of your
lighting when cornering.

V
without directional lighting Operating fault
If a fault occurs, this warning
lamp flashes in the instru-
ment panel, accompanied
by a message in the multi-
function screen.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a quali-
fied workshop.

When stationary or moving at very

low speed or when reverse gear is
engaged, the function is inactive.
The status of the function remains
in the memory when the ignition is
with directional lighting switched off.

91
 VISIBILITY

WIPER CONTROLS Manual controls Rear wiper (Tourer)

System for selection and control of The wiper commands are issued di-
the various front and rear wiping rectly by the driver by means of the
modes for the elimination of rain and stalk A and the ring B.
cleaning.
The vehicle's front and rear wipers
are designed to improve the driver's
visibility progressively according to
the climatic conditions.

Windscreen wipers
A. Wiping speed selection stalk.
V
B. rear wiper selection ring:
Fast (heavy rain).

Normal (moderate rain). park,

Intermittent (proportional to
the speed of the vehicle).

Off. intermittent wipe,

Programming Single wipe (press down and

Various automatic wiper control release). wash-wipe (set duration).
modes are also available according or
to the following options:
- automatic rain sensitive wind- Automatic, then single
screen wipers, wipe (see the corre- If a significant accumulation of
- rear wiping on engaging reverse sponding section). snow or ice is present, or when
gear. using a tailgate bicycle carrier, de-
activate the automatic rear wiper
via the instrument panel screen
configuration menu.

92
 VISIBILITY

Reverse gear Automatic rain sensitive Switching off

When reverse gear is engaged, the windscreen wipers This is controlled manually by the
rear wiper operates if the windscreen driver by moving stalk A upwards
wipers are operating. The windscreen wipers operate auto- and returning it to position "0".
matically, without any action on the part
of the driver, if rain is detected (sensor It is accompanied by a message in
behind the rear view mirror), adapting the instrument panel screen.
Programming their speed to the intensity of the rain- The automatic wiping must be reac-
fall. tivated if the ignition has been off for
The function is activated or deac- more than one minute, by pushing
tivated via the instrument panel stalk A downwards.
screen configuration menu.
This function is activated by default.
V
Operating fault
If an automatic wiping malfunction
Windscreen and headlamp occurs, the wipers will operate in in-
wash termittent mode.
Have it checked by a CITROËN
) Pull the windscreen wiper stalk dealer or a qualified workshop.
towards you. The windscreen
wash then the windscreen wip-
ers operate for a fixed period.
The headlamp washers only operate Activation
when the dipped beam headlamps
are on. This is controlled manually by the
driver by moving stalk A to the
"AUTO" position. Do not cover the rain sensor, linked
It is accompanied by a message in with the sunshine sensor and locat-
the instrument panel screen. ed in the centre of the windscreen
behind the rear view mirror.
Switch off the automatic wiping when
using an automatic car wash.
In winter, it is advisable to wait until
the windscreen is completely clear
of ice before activating the auto-
matic wiping.

93
 VISIBILITY

Special position of COURTESY LAMPS In this position, the courtesy

the windscreen wipers lamp comes on gradually:
Front courtesy lamp
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when a door is opened,
- when the key is removed from
the ignition,
- when the remote control locking
button is activated, in order to lo-
cate your vehicle.
This position permits release of the
windscreen wiper blades.
V It switches off gradually:
It is used for cleaning or replacement
of the blades. It can also be useful, - when the vehicle is locked,
in winter, to detach the blades from - when the ignition is switched on,
the windscreen. 1. Front courtesy lamp
- 30 seconds after the last door is
2. Map reading lamps closed.
) Any action on the wiper stalk in
the minute after switching off the Rear courtesy lamp
ignition places the blades verti-
cally on the screen. Lighting off.
) To park the blades again, switch
on the ignition and operate the
wiper stalk.
Lighting on.

To maintain the effectiveness of the

"flat-blade" type of wiper blades, it
is advisable to:
- handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using soapy
water,
- avoid using them to retain card- 1. Rear courtesy lamp
board on the windscreen, 2. Map reading lamps
- replace them at the first signs
of wear.

94
 VISIBILITY

Panoramic sunroof rear

In lighting on mode, different lighting reading lamps (Tourer)
times are available:
- with the ignition off, approxi-
mately ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode, ap-
proximately thirty seconds,
- with the engine running, unlimited.

Map reading lamps

) With the ignition on, press the V
corresponding switch.
With the key in position or with the
ignition on:
) Press the corresponding switch.
The reading lamp concerned comes
on for ten minutes.

The rear reading lamps come on:

- when the key is removed from
the ignition,
- when the vehicle is unlocked.
They switch off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on.

95
 VISIBILITY

INTERIOR MOOD LIGHTING Central console Lighting for door opening

controls
Your vehicle is equipped with interior The lamps are located on the roof
mood lighting for the centre console console, near the front interior lamp.
and the door handles. They illuminate the central console.

Operation
These lamps are activated with the
automatic illumination of headlamps,
when the ambient light is poor. They
are deactivated when the instrument
panel is off.
V The intensity of the lighting varies
along with that of the instrument This is located on the front and rear
panel. interior door opening controls.
) Press buttons A to increase or The rear door opening controls lighting
reduce the intensity of the lighting. is deactivated if the child lock is on.

96
 VISIBILITY

WELCOME LIGHTING

The welcome lighting is made up of:

- The interior (roof) lamps.
- The floor lighting.
- The pavement lighting when a
door is open.

Floor lighting Pavement lighting

V

In the front of the vehicle, when a With the door open, this illuminates
door is opened, this illuminates the the ground next to the vehicle.
interior of the vehicle.

97
 FITTINGS

SUN VISOR COOLED GLOVE BOX SKI FLAP

VI
) With the ignition on, lift the flap; ) To open the glove box, pull on A flap in the backrest, located to the
the mirror is illuminated automa- the handle and lower the lid. rear of the armrest, facilitates the
tically. The glove box has a manually clos- carrying of long objects.
To prevent dazzle from ahead, fold able air vent B.
the visor downwards. To open
It has 2 or 3 sockets C to connect
It can be disengaged from its central audio/video equipment and a hold- ) Lower the rear armrest.
fixing and pivoted over to the side er for a SIM card (see "Audio and
windows if required. Telematics"). ) Pull the flap handle down.
It has automatic illumination. ) Lower the flap.
It provides access to the dashboard ) Load the objects from inside the
fusebox. boot.

Ensure that the objects are well se-

! The glove box should be
kept closed while driving.
cured and that they do not impede
the operation of the gear lever.

98
 FITTINGS

MATS Adjustment
To optimise your driving position:
To avoid any interference with the
pedals: ) lift the control A,
- only use mats which are suit- ) push the armrest forwards.
able for the fixings already The armrest returns to its initial posi-
present in the vehicle. The use tion when you push it rearwards.
of these fixings is essential,
- never fit more than 1 mat.
The use of a mat not approved by
CITROËN may obstruct access to
the pedals and hinder the cruise Cup-holder / USB port
control/speed limiter function.
Floor mats approved by CITROËN
Equipment available for the driver are fitted with a 3rd fixing located in
and front passenger. the pedal area to avoid any risk of VI
interference with the pedals.

Removing
) Slide the seat back as far as pos- FRONT ARMREST
sible,
) unclip the fixings,
) remove the fixings, then the mat.

The front armrest includes a cup

Refitting holder and a USB port.
) Position the mat correctly, The USB port allows connection of
a portable device, such as a USB
) clip the fixings, memory stick, sending the audio
) check that the mat is held is files to your audio system so that
place correctly. they can be heard via the vehicle's
speakers.
) Lift the armrest to access the cup
Comfort and storage system for the holder or the USB port.
driver and front passenger.
99
 FITTINGS

Driver's oddments tray Cup-holder SIDE BLINDS

The rear cup-holder A is located in
the rear central armrest.
) Lower the rear armrest.
) Pull forwards to extract the cup-
holder.

Storage
) Lift up the upper part of the rear
central armrest to access stor-
age space B.
) Pull the handle towards you.
VI ) Pull on the tab A and position the
blind on the hook B.
REAR ARMREST 12 V ACCESSORIES SOCKET REAR BLIND (SALOON)

Comfort and storage system for the This is located in the rear ashtray. ) pull on the tab C to unreel the
rear passengers. Max power: 100 W. blind,
) position the blind on the hooks D.

100
 FITTINGS

BOOT FITTINGS (SALOON) Luggage securing rings

) Use the 4 securing rings on the
boot floor to secure your luggage.
For safety reasons in the event of
sharp braking, you are advised to
place heavy objects as far forward
in the boot as possible.

VI

1. Battery location for vehicles with 3. Boot lamp.

V6 HDi engine. 4. Location for 6 CD changer.
2. Boot floor (spare wheel storage).

101
 FITTINGS

BOOT FITTINGS (TOURER)

VI
1. Hook 1. Luggage-cover blind 1. Boot lamp
For shopping bags. (see details on following page) 2. 12 V accessories socket (100 W
2. Torch 2. Luggage securing rings maximum)
To recharge, return it to its stor- Use the 4 stowing rings provided Cigarette lighter type 12 volt
age position. on the boot floor to secure your socket. It is located on the rear
3. Storage net or Battery com- loads. right-hand trim.
partment (for vehicles with For safety reasons in the event 3. Loading height control
3 litre V6 HDi engine). of sharp braking, you are ad- You can change the height of the
This provides access to the bat- vised to place heavy objects as vehicle to make loading or un-
tery. far forwards as possible. loading easier.
3. Hooks 4. Hook
These allow a cargo net to be For shopping bags.
fitted (see details on following 5. Storage net or closed housing
page).
Location for the 6 CD changer.

102
 FITTINGS

LUGGAGE COVER (TOURER) High load retaining net

(Tourer)

To roll up To install VI
) Press the handle (PRESS) gen- ) Position the left-hand end of the
tly. The luggage cover rolls up luggage cover roller in its loca-
automatically. tion B behind the rear bench
The moving part A can be folded seat.
along the rear bench seat backrest. ) Compress the roller control 1 Hooked onto the special upper and
and put the roller in place in its lower fixings, this permits use of the
location C on the right. entire loading volume up to the roof:
) Release the control to secure - behind the rear seats (row 2),
the luggage cover. - behind the front seats (row 1)
) Unroll it to its fastening on the when the rear seats are folded.
rear pillar. When positioning the net, check that
the strap loops are visible from the
boot; this will make slackening or
tightening easier.

To remove
) Compress the control 1 and lift
the luggage cover on the right
then on the left to remove it.
103
 FITTINGS

Row 1 Row 2
To use it in row 1: To use it in row 2:
) fold down the ) open the cov-
backs of the ers 4 of the
rear seats, correspond-
) open the cov- ing upper fix-
ers 3 of the ings,
corresponding
upper fixings, ) from the rear bench seat, unroll
) unroll the high load retaining net the high load retaining net, push-
and position one of the ends of ing it to detach it from the retaining
the net's metal bar in the cor- hooks,
responding fixing cover. Check ) position one of the ends of the
that the hook is secured in the net's metal bar in the corre-
rail located inside the cover 3, sponding fixing cover. Check
VI ) pull the high load retaining net's that the hook is secured in the
metal bar to position the other rail located inside the cover,
hook in the second fixing cover. ) position the other hook in the
Installation second fixing cover and pull the
) fold down the backs of the rear metal bar towards you.
seats,
) position the high load retaining
net roller above the two rails 1 lo-
cated behind the rear seats (2/3
bench seat). The two notches 2
must be placed above the two
rails,
) slide the two rails 1 into the
notches 2 and push the roller
(lengthways) from right to left to
secure it,
) reposition the rear seat backs.

104
 CHILD SAFETY

GENERAL POINTS RELATING

TO CHILD SEATS
Although one of CITROËN's main "Rearwards-facing" "Forwards-facing"
criteria when designing your vehicle, When a "rearwards-facing" child When a "forwards-facing" child seat
the safety of your children also de- seat is installed on the front pas- is installed on the front passenger
pends on you. senger seat, it is essential that the seat, adjust the vehicle's seat to the
For maximum safety, please observe passenger airbag is deactivated. intermediate longitudinal position
the following recommendations: Otherwise, the child would risk with the seat back upright and leave
- in accordance with European being seriously injured or killed if the passenger airbag activated.
regulations, all children under the airbag were to inflate.
the age of 12 or less than one
and a half metres tall must
travel in approved child seats
suited to their weight, on seats
fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX
mountings*,
- statistically, the safest seats in
your vehicle for carrying chil-
dren are the rear seats, VII
- a child weighing less than 9 kg
must travel in the "rearwards-
facing" position both in the
front and in the rear.

Intermediate longitudinal
position

CITROËN recommends that

children should travel in the rear
seats of your vehicle:
- "rearwards-facing" up to the
age of 2,
* The rules for carrying children are
- "forwards-facing" over the specific to each country. Refer
age of 2. to the current legislation in your
country.
105
 CHILD SAFETY

Refer to the advice given on the label

present on both sides of the passen-
ger's sun visor.
Passenger airbag OFF

VII

To assure the safety of your child, you must deactivate the passen-
! ger's front airbag when you install a child seat in the rearwards facing
position on the front passenger's seat.
Otherwise, there is a risk that the child could be seriously injured or killed
if the airbag were deployed.

106
 CHILD SAFETY

CHILD SEATS RECOMMENDED BY CITROËN

CITROËN offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt:

Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Groups 1, 2 and 3: from 9 to 36 kg

L2
L1
"KIDDY Comfort Pro"
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"
The impact shield must be used for
Installed in the rearwards-facing carrying young children
position. (from 9 to 18 kg).

Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

VII

L4
"KLIPPAN Optima"
From the age of 6 years (approximately 22 kg), the booster is used on its own.

L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.

107
 CHILD SAFETY

POSITIONS FOR CHILD SEATS SECURED USING THE SEAT BELT

In conformity with European law, this table shows you the possibilities for the installation of universally approved child
seats (a) using a seat belt, depending on the weight of the child and the seating position in the vehicle.

Weight of child

Seat position(s) Groups 0 (c) Group 1 Group 2 Group 3

and 0+
9 to 18 kg 15 to 25 kg 22 to 36 kg
< 13 kg

Front passenger (b) with U (R) U (R) U (R) U (R)

height adjustment
Row 1
Front passenger (b)
VII without height U U U U
adjustment

Outer rear U U U U

Row 2

Centre rear U U U U

(a) Universal child seat: child seat which can be installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.
(b) Consult the current legislation for your country before driving with your child in this seat.
(c) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Shells and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat.
U: seat position suitable for installation of universally approved rearwards-facing and/or forwards-facing child seat.
U (R): As U, with the vehicle seat, which must be adjusted to the highest position.

108
 CHILD SAFETY

"ISOFIX" MOUNTINGS In the rear

Your vehicle has been approved in This ISOFIX mounting system pro-
accordance with the new ISOFIX vides fast, reliable and safe fitting
regulations. of the child seat in your vehicle.
The outer rear seats are fitted with The ISOFIX child seats are fitted
regulation ISOFIX mountings. with two locks which are secured
easily on the two rings A, following
installation of the guides (supplied
with the seat).
Some also have an upper strap
which is attached to the ring B or C.
To attach this strap in the rear, re-
move the vehicle seat's head re-
straint and stow it. Lift the cover on
the rear shelf (Saloon) or the roof
(Tourer). Then fix the hook on the
Saloon ring B or C and tighten the upper
strap.
These are three rings for each outer
rear seat: The incorrect installation of a child
seat in a vehicle compromises the VII
- two lower rings A, located be- child's protection in the event of an
tween the vehicle seat back and accident.
cushion, indicated by a label,
For information regarding the
- an upper ring B, fixed to the rear ISOFIX child seats which can be
shelf, concealed under a flap installed in your vehicle, consult
with the logo TOP TETHER be- the table of positions for fitting
hind the head restraint. ISOFIX child seats.

Tourer
- two lower rings A, located be-
tween the vehicle seat back and
cushion, indicated by a label,
- an upper ring C, fixed to the
roof on the boot side, concealed
under a flap with the logo TOP
TETHER.

109
 CHILD SAFETY

ADVICE ON CHILD SEATS

The incorrect installation of a child Installing a booster seat
seat in a vehicle compromises the The chest part of the seat belt must
child's protection in the event of an be positioned on the child's shoulder
accident. without touching the neck.
When installing a child seat using the Ensure that the lap part of the seat
seat belt, check that the seat belt is belt passes correctly over the child's
tightened correctly on the child seat thighs.
and that it secures the child seat
firmly on the seat of your vehicle. CITROËN recommends the use of a
booster seat which has a back, fit-
Remember to fasten the seat belts ted with a seat belt guide at shoulder
or the child seat harnesses keeping level.
the slack in relation to the child's
body to a minimum, even for short
journeys. As a safety precaution, do not leave:
For optimum installation of the "for- - one or more children alone and
wards-facing" child seat, ensure that unsupervised in a vehicle,
the back of the child seat is in con- - a child or an animal in a vehicle
VII tact with the back of the vehicle's which is exposed to the sun, with
seat and that the head restraint does the windows closed,
not cause any discomfort. - the keys within reach of children
If the head restraint has to be re- inside the vehicle.
moved, ensure that it is stored or To prevent accidental opening of the
attached securely to prevent it from doors, use the "Child lock".
being thrown around the vehicle in
the event of sharp braking. Take care not to open the rear win-
dows by more than one third.
Children under the age of 10 must
not travel in the "forwards-facing" To protect young children from the
position on the front passenger seat, rays of the sun, fit side blinds on the
unless the rear seats are already oc- rear windows.
cupied by other children, cannot be
used or are absent.
Deactivate the passenger airbag*
when a "rearwards-facing" child
seat is installed on the front seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk be- * According to country and current
ing seriously injured or killed if the local legislation.
airbag were to inflate.
110
 CHILD SAFETY

ISOFIX CHILD SEAT RECOMMENDED BY CITROËN AND APPROVED FOR YOUR VEHICLE

RÖMER BabySafe Plus ISOFIX (size category E)

Group 0+: up to 13 kg

Installed in the rearwards-facing position using an ISOFIX

base which is attached to the rings A.
The stay on the ISOFIX base must be adjusted in height so that it is in
contact with the floor of the vehicle.

RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX (size category B1)

VII
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Installed in the forwards-facing position.

Fitted with an upper strap to be secured on the upper ring B or C,
referred to as the TOP TETHER.
Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.

This child seat can also be used on seats which are not fitted with ISOFIX mountings. In this case, it must be attached
to the vehicle seat using the three point seat belt.
Follow the instructions for fitting the child seat given in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.
111
 CHILD SAFETY

POSITIONS FOR FITTING ISOFIX CHILD SEATS

In conformity with European law (ECE 16), this table shows you the possibilities for the installation of ISOFIX child seats
to seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mounting points.
For ISOFIX universal and semi-universal child seats, the ISOFIX size class, defined by a letter from A to G, is shown on
the child seat to the right of the ISOFIX logo.

Weight of child/Age given as a guide

Up to 10 kg
Up to 10 kg (group 0)
(group 0) 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
Up to 13 kg
Up to around (group 0+) Approx 1 to 3 years
6 months
Up to around 1 year

Type of ISOFIX child seat Shell "Rearwards-facing" "Rearwards-facing" "Forwards-facing"

ISOFIX size class F G C D E C D A B B1

VII
Universal and semi-universal
ISOFIX child seats can be
installed on: X IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU
- Front passenger seat

- Outer rear seats IL-SU* IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU

- Centre rear seat Non ISOFIX seat position

IUF: Seat position suitable for installation of an Isofix Universal "Forwards-facing" seat attached using the top tether.
IL-SU: Seat position suitable for installation of an ISOFIX Semi-Universal child seat, either:
- "rearwards-facing" fitted with an upper strap or a stay,
- "forwards-facing" fitted with a stay,
- a shell fitted with an upper strap or a stay.
To attach the upper strap, refer to the "ISOFIX mountings" paragraph.
X: Seat not suitable for installation of an ISOFIX seat of the size class indicated
* The ISOFIX shell, fixed to the lower rings of an ISOFIX seat, occupies two rear seats.
112
 CHILD SAFETY

ELECTRIC Deactivation
CHILD LOCK ) Press button A again.
Remote control system to prevent The indicator lamp in button A goes
opening of the rear doors using their off, accompanied by a message in
interior controls and use of the rear the instrument panel screen.
electric windows. This indicator lamp remains off until
the child lock is activated.

Any other status of the indicator

lamp indicates a fault with the elec-
tric child lock. Have it checked by a
CITROËN or a qualified workshop.

This system is independent and in

no circumstances does it take the
place of the central locking control. VII
Check the status of the child lock
The control is located on the driver's each time you switch on the ignition.
door, with the electric window controls. Always remove the key from the
ignition when leaving the vehicle,
even for a short time.
In the event of a serious impact,
the electric child lock is deactivated
Activation automatically to permit the exit of
the rear passengers.
) Press button A.
The indicator lamp in button A comes
on, accompanied by a message in
the instrument panel screen.

113
 SAFETY

DIRECTION INDICATORS HAZARD WARNING LAMPS

Selection of the left or right direction A visual warning by means of the di- Audible warning to alert other road
indicators to signal a change of di- rection indicators to alert other road users to an imminent danger.
rection of the vehicle. users to a vehicle breakdown, tow-
ing or accident.

) Press the left or right-hand part

of the fixed centred controls
steering wheel.

Use the horn moderately and only

) Left: lower the lighting stalk be- ) Press this button, the direction in the following cases:
yond the point of resistance. indicators flash. - immediate danger,
) Right: raise the lighting stalk be- They can operate with the ignition off.
VIII yond the point of resistance.
- when approaching an area
where there is no visibility.
Automatic operation of
hazard warning lamps
"Motorway" function EMERGENCY OR
When braking in an emergency, ASSISTANCE CALL
) Press briefly upwards or down- depending on the deceleration, the
wards, without going beyond the hazard warning lamps come on au-
point of resistance; the direction tomatically.
indicators will flash 3 times. They switch off automatically the
first time you accelerate.
This system allows you to make an
) You can also switch them off by emergency or assistance call to the
pressing the button. emergency services or to the dedi-
cated CITROËN service.
For more information on the use of
this function, refer to the "Audio and
telematics" section.
114
 SAFETY

TYRE UNDER-INFLATION Tyre pressures OK Under-inflated tyre

DETECTION display
System which automatically checks
the pressures of the tyres while driving.

Choice of detection
This function provides warning of
tyres that are under-inflated or punc-
tured. automatic detection
) Press on button A (CHECK).
Automatic detection
The system indicates to you that the
Sensors monitor the tyre pressures. tyres are correctly inflated.
In the event of an anomaly, a mes- This information is only available on
sage will appear in the instrument request by the driver.
panel screen.

Driver request detection

You can check the tyre pressures at
any time.
detection on request
VIII
) Press on button A (CHECK); the
information will be displayed in
the instrument panel screen. Automatic detection:
A message indicates which tyre is
under-inflated.

Driver request detection:

The vehicle outline indicates the
under-inflated tyre(s).
The message is accompanied by il-
lumination of the SERVICE warning
lamp and an audible beep.
) Check the tyre pressures as
soon as possible.

115
 SAFETY

Punctured tyre Wheel not monitored

) If you have fitted wheels that
are not equipped with tyre defla-
tion detection (wheels with snow
tyres, etc.), contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.

automatic detection automatic detection

The deflation detection system is a

driving aid, but which does not ab-
solve the driver from the need to be
vigilant and responsible.
This system does not dispense
with the requirement to check
the tyres on a regular basis (see
"Identification markings") to ensure
VIII detection on request detection on request optimum vehicle behaviour and to
avoid premature tyre wear under
certain conditions (high load, high
Automatic detection: Automatic detection: speed).
A message indicates which tyre is A message indicates to you which Do not forget to check the tyre
punctured. wheel is not monitored. pressure of the spare wheel.
Any repair or replacement of a tyre
Driver request detection: Driver request detection: on a wheel that is equipped with
a sensor must be carried out by
The vehicle outline indicates the The vehicle outline indicates the a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
punctured tyre(s). wheel(s) which is/are not moni- workshop.
The message is accompanied by tored.
The system may suffer from tem-
illumination of the STOP warning ) The message is accompanied by porary interference caused by
lamp and an audible beep. illumination of the SERVICE warn- electro-magnetic transmissions on
ing lamp and an audible beep. frequencies close to that use by
have it checked by a CITROËN the system.
dealer or a qualified workshop.
116
 SAFETY

BRAKING ASSISTANCE Operating fault Emergency braking assistance

SYSTEMS
System which, in an emergency,
Group of supplementary systems If this warning lamp comes enables you to obtain the optimum
which help you to obtain optimum on, accompanied by an braking pressure more quickly, thus
braking in complete safety in emer- audible signal and a mes- reducing the stopping distance.
gency situations: sage in the instrument panel
screen, it indicates a fault with the
- anti-lock braking system (ABS), anti-lock braking system which could Activation
- electronic brake force distribution result in loss of control of the vehicle It is triggered by the speed at which
(EBFD), when braking. the brake pedal is pressed.
- emergency braking assistance The effect of this is a reduction in
(EBA). If this warning lamp comes the resistance of the pedal and an
on, together with the STOP increase in braking efficiency.
and ABS warning lamps, ac-
companied by an audible sig-
nal and a message in the instrument
Anti-lock braking system panel screen, it indicates a fault with
and electronic brake force the electronic brake force distribution When braking in an emergency,
distribution which could result in loss of control of press firmly without releasing the
the vehicle when braking. pressure.
Linked systems which improve the You MUST stop as soon as it is
stability and manoeuvrability of your safe to do so.
vehicle when braking, in particular
In both cases, contact a CITROËN VIII
on poor or slippery surfaces.
dealer or a qualified workshop.

Activation
The anti-lock braking system comes
into operation automatically when
there is a risk of wheel lock. When replacing wheels (tyres and
Normal operation of the ABS may rims), ensure that they conform to
make itself felt by slight vibration of the manufacturer's recommenda-
the brake pedal. tions.

When braking in an emergency,

press very firmly without releasing
the pressure.

117
 SAFETY

TRAJECTORY CONTROL For vehicles with Hydractive III + Deactivation

SYSTEMS suspension, manual adjustment of In exceptional conditions (starting a
ground clearance to the intermediate vehicle which is bogged down, stuck
position improves further the ability in snow, on soft ground...), it may be
Anti-slip regulation (ASR) to make progress in deep snow (see advisable to deactivate the ASR and
and electronic stability the relevant paragraph). ESP systems, so that the wheels
programme (ESP) The use of snow tyres is strongly can move freely and regain grip.
recommended on surfaces with low
The anti-slip regulation (also known adhesion.
as Traction Control) optimises trac-
tion to prevent skidding of the wheels,
by acting on the brakes of the driving
wheels and on the engine.
The electronic stability programme acts
on the brake of one or more wheels
and on the engine to keep the vehicle Activation
on the trajectory required by the driver,
within the limits of the laws of physics. These systems are activated auto-
matically each time the vehicle is
started.
They come into operation in the event
Intelligent traction control of a grip or trajectory problem.
system ("Snow motion")
VIII
Your vehicle has a system to im- ) Press the "ESP OFF" button, lo-
prove traction on snow: intelligent This is indicated by flashing
of this warning lamp in the cated in the middle of the dash-
traction control. board.
instrument panel.
This system detects situations of low
adhesion that might make moving off
and progress difficult on deep fresh If this warning lamp comes on in
snow or compacted snow. the instrument panel and the in-
dicator lamp in the button comes
In these situations the intelligent on, this indicates that the ASR and
traction control system regulates ESP systems are deactivated.
the amount of wheel slip to optimise
the traction and trajectory control of
your vehicle. It is recommended that these systems
be reactivated as soon as possible.

118
 SAFETY

Reactivation SEAT BELTS The pretensioning seat belts are ac-

Below 30 mph (50 km/h), press the tive when the ignition is on.
"ESP OFF" button to reactivate The force limiter reduces the pres-
these systems. sure of the seat belt against the
They are reactivated automatically chest of the occupant, so increasing
above 30 mph (50 km/h) or every his protection.
time the ignition is switched off.

Operating fault Fastening

If this warning lamp comes ) Pull the belt down in front of you
on, accompanied by an in a steady movement, making
audible signal and a mes- sure that it does not become
sage in the instrument panel twisted.
screen, this indicates a fault with ) Press the fastening into its buckle.
these systems. ) Check that it is properly secured
Have it checked by a CITROËN and that the automatic locking
dealer or a qualified workshop. mechanism operates correctly
by pulling sharply on the belt
strap.
) The lap strap should be posi-
The ESP/ASR systems offer ex- tioned as low down as possible VIII
ceptional safety in normal driving, in the lap and as tight as pos-
but this should not encourage the sible.
driver to take extra risks or drive at Front seat belts ) The diagonal strap should be
high speed. positioned across the chest and
The correct operation of these sys- The front seat belts are fitted with away from the neck.
tems depends on observation of a pretensioning system and force Each belt has a reel that adjusts its
the manufacturer's recommenda- limiter. length automatically to the girth of
tions regarding the wheels (tyres This system improves safety in the the seat occupant.
and rims), the braking components, front seats in the event of a front
the electronic components and ob- impact.
servation of the assembly and re-
pair procedures used by CITROËN Depending on the seriousness of the
dealers. impact, the pretensioning system in-
stantly tightens the seat belt against
After an impact, have these systems the body of the occupant.
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.

119
 SAFETY

Height adjustment Rear seat belts

When correctly adjusted, the seat Each rear seat is fitted with a three-
belt shoulder strap falls over the point inertia reel seat belt with force
middle of the shoulder. limiter.
) To adjust the belt, squeeze the
control and slide it in the direc-
tion required.
VIII Fastening
) Pull the strap, then insert the
Unfastening tongue in the buckle.
) To unfasten the belt, press on ) Check that the seat belt is fastened
the red button in the buckle. correctly by pulling the strap.
The belt retracts automatically when
not in use.
Unfastening
) Press the red button on the
buckle.

120
 SAFETY

The driver must ensure that passen- In order to be effective, a seat belt Recommendations for children
gers use the seat belts correctly and must: Use a suitable child seat if the pas-
that they are all restrained securely - be tightened as close to the body senger is less than 12 years old or
before setting off. as possible, shorter than one and a half metres.
Wherever you are seated in the ve- - be pulled in front of you with a Never use the same seat belt to se-
hicle, always fasten your seat belt, smooth movement, checking cure more than one person.
even for short journeys. that it does not twist, Never allow a child to travel on your
Do not interchange the seat belt - be used to restrain only one person, lap.
buckles as they will not fulfil their
role fully. - not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,
The seat belts are fitted with an in- - not be converted or modified to
ertia reel permitting automatic ad- avoid affecting its performance.
In the event of an impact
justment of the length of the strap
to your size. The seat belt is stowed Depending on the nature and se-
automatically when not in use. riousness of the impact, the pre-
tensioning device may be deployed
Before and after use, ensure that the before and independently of the
seat belt is reeled in correctly. airbags. Deployment of the preten-
In accordance with current safety
The lower part of the strap must be regulations, for all repairs on your ve- sioners is accompanied by a slight
positioned as low as possible on the hicle, go to a qualified workshop with discharge of harmless smoke and
pelvis. the skills and equipment needed, a noise, due to the activation of the
The upper part must be positioned which a CITROËN dealer is able to pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated
in the hollow of the shoulder. provide. in the system. VIII
The inertia reels are fitted with an Have your seat belts checked regu- In all cases, the airbag warning lamp
automatic locking device which larly by a CITROËN dealer or a comes on.
comes into operation in the event qualified workshop, particularly if the Following an impact, have the seat
of a collision, emergency braking or straps show signs of damage. belts system checked, and if neces-
if the vehicle rolls over. You can re- Clean the seat belt straps with soapy sary replaced, by a CITROËN dealer
lease the device by pulling firmly on water or a textile cleaning product, or a qualified workshop.
the strap and releasing it so that it sold by CITROËN dealers.
reels in slightly.
After folding or moving a seat or rear
bench seat, ensure that the seat belt
is positioned and reeled in correctly.

121
 SAFETY

AIRBAGS
System designed to maximise the
safety of the occupants (with the
exception of the rear centre pas-
senger) in the event of violent col-
lisions. It supplements the action of
the force-limiting seat belts.

If a collision occurs, the electronic

detectors record and analyse the
front and side impacts sustained in
the impact detection zones:
- in the case of a serious impact,
the airbags are deployed instantly
and protect the occupants of the
vehicle (with the exception of the
rear centre passenger); immedi-
ately after the impact, the airbags
deflate rapidly so that they do not
hinder visibility or the exit of the
occupants,
VIII - in the case of a minor or rear im-
pact or in certain roll-over con-
ditions, the airbags will not be
deployed; the seat belt alone Impact detection zones
is sufficient to provide optimum Deployment of the airbag(s) is ac-
protection in these situations. A. Front impact zone. companied by a slight emission of
B. Side impact zone. harmless smoke and a noise, due to
the activation of the pyrotechnic car-
tridge incorporated in the system.
This smoke is not harmful, but sen-
sitive individuals may experience
The airbags do not operate when slight irritation.
the ignition is switched off.
The noise of the detonation may
This equipment will only operate result in a slight loss of hearing for
once. If a second impact occurs (dur- a short time.
ing the same or a subsequent acci-
dent), the airbag will not operate.

122
 SAFETY

Front airbags Deactivation Activation

When you remove the child seat,
System which protects the head and turn switch 1 to the "ON" position to
chest of the driver and front passen- reactivate the airbag and so assure
ger in the event of a front impact. the safety of your front passenger in
The driver's airbag is fitted in the the event of an impact.
centre of the steering wheel; the
front passenger's airbag is fitted in
the dashboard above the glove box.

Operating fault
If this symbol appears in the
instrument panel screen,
accompanied by an audible
Only the front passenger's airbag warning and a message,
can be deactivated: contact a CITROËN dealer or a
) with the ignition off, insert the qualified workshop to have the sys-
key in the passenger airbag de- tem checked. The airbags may no
activation switch 1, longer be deployed in the event of a
) turn it to the "OFF" position, serious impact.
) then, remove the key keeping If this warning lamp flashes, VIII
the switch in this position. contact a CITROËN dealer
Deployment or a qualified workshop.
This warning lamp comes on
The airbags are deployed simultane- in the roof console screen
ously, unless the passenger's front when the ignition is on and
airbag is deactivated, in the event of until the airbag is reactivated.
a serious front impact to all or part of
the front impact zone A, in the lon-
gitudinal centreline of the vehicle on To assure the safety of your child,
a horizontal plane and directed from the passenger's airbag must be
the front to the rear of the vehicle. deactivated when you install a If both airbag warning lamps come
The front airbag inflates between the "rearwards-facing" child seat on on continuously, do not install a
front occupant of the vehicle and the the front passenger seat. "rearwards-facing" child seat on
dashboard to cushion their forward Otherwise, the child would risk be- the front passenger seat.
movement. ing seriously injured or killed if the Have it checked by a CITROËN
airbag were deployed. dealer or a qualified workshop.
123
 SAFETY

Lateral airbags* Impact detection zones Deployment

It is deployed at the same time as
System which protects the driver the corresponding lateral airbag in
and front passenger in the event of the event of a serious side impact to
a serious side impact in order to limit all or part of the side impact zone B,
the risk of injury to the chest. perpendicular to the longitudinal cen-
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the treline of the vehicle on a horizontal
front seat back frame, on the outer plane and directed from the outside
side. towards the inside of the vehicle.
The curtain airbag inflates between
the front or rear occupant of the ve-
hicle and the windows.

A. Front impact zone.

In the event of a minor impact or
B. Side impact zone. bump on the side of the vehicle or
if the vehicle rolls over, the airbag
may not be deployed.
The airbag is not deployed in the
Curtain airbags* event of a rear or front collision.

VIII System which protects the driver

Deployment and passengers (with the exception
It is deployed unilaterally in the of the rear centre passenger) in the
event of a serious side impact ap- event of a serious side impact in or-
plied to all or part of the side impact der to limit the risk of head injuries. Operating fault
zone B, perpendicular to the longi- Each curtain airbag is fitted in the
tudinal centreline of the vehicle on pillars and the upper part of the pas- If this symbol appears in the
a horizontal plane and directed from senger compartment. instrument panel screen,
the outside towards the inside of the accompanied by an audible
vehicle. signal and a message, con-
The lateral airbag inflates between tact a CITROËN dealer or a quali-
the front occupant of the vehicle and fied workshop to have the system
the corresponding door trim panel. checked. The airbags may no longer
be deployed in the event of a seri-
ous impact.

* According to country.
124
 SAFETY

For the airbags to be fully

effective, observe the following
safety rules:
Sit in a normal upright position. Front airbags Curtain airbags
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt. Do not drive holding the steering Do not fix or attach anything to the
Do not leave anything between the wheel by its spokes or resting your roof. This could cause injury to the
occupants and the airbags (a child, hands on the centre part of the head if the curtain airbag is de-
pet, object...). This could hamper the wheel. ployed.
operation of the airbags or injure the Passengers must not place their feet If fitted on your vehicle, do not re-
occupants. on the dashboard. move the grab handles installed on
After an accident or if the vehicle If possible, do not smoke as deploy- the roof, they play a part in securing
has been stolen or broken into, have ment of the airbags can cause burns the curtain airbags.
the airbag systems checked. or the risk of injury from a cigarette
All work on the airbag system must or pipe.
be carried out by a CITROËN dealer Never remove or pierce the steering
or a qualified workshop. wheel or hit it violently.
Even if all of the precautions men-
tioned are observed, a risk of injury
or of minor burns to the head, chest
or arms when an airbag is deployed
cannot be ruled out. The bag inflates Lateral airbags
almost instantly (within a few mil- Use only approved covers on the VIII
liseconds) then deflates within the seats, compatible with the deployment
same time discharging the hot gas the lateral airbags. For information
via openings provided for this pur- on the range of seat covers suitable
pose. for your vehicle, you can contact a
CITROËN dealer (see "Practical in-
formation - § Accessories").
Do not fix or attach anything to the
seat backs (clothing...). This could
cause injury to the chest or arms if
the lateral airbag is deployed.
Do not sit with the upper part of the
body any nearer to the door than
necessary.

125
 DRIVING

MANUAL PARKING BRAKE Release

) Press on the end of the lever
whilst pulling it then lower it fully.

This warning lamp comes

on if the parking brake is en-
gaged or not fully released.

If the parking brake is released,

the illumination of this warning lamp
along with the STOP warning lamp
indicates that the brake fluid level
is low or a fault with the brake force
distributor.
You must stop as soon as it is safe
Mechanical device for immobilising to do so.
the vehicle when stationary. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.

Application
) Pull the parking brake lever up to
immobilise your vehicle.
To facilitate the action on the lever,
IX you are recommended to press the
brake pedal at the same time.

! In all circumstances, as a pre-

cautionary measure, engage
first gear.
On steep gradients, turn the steering
wheel towards the pavement.

126
 DRIVING

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE Automatic operation

Application with the engine off Application with the engine running
With the vehicle stationary, the park- With the engine running and the ve-
ing brake is automatically applied hicle stationary, in order to immobi-
when the engine is switched off. lise the vehicle you need to manually
The application of the parking brake apply the parking brake by pulling
is confirmed by: on control lever A.
The application of the parking brake
- warning lamp P in the con- is confirmed by:
trol lever A coming on,
- warning lamp P in the con-
- this warning lamp in the in- trol lever A coming on,
strument panel coming on,
- this warning lamp in the in-
strument panel coming on,
- display of a message "parking
brake on" in the instrument panel - display of a message "parking
screen. brake on" in the instrument panel
The electric parking brake combines The noise of operation will confirm to screen.
2 operating modes: you the application/ release of your When the driver’s door is opened, a
electric parking brake. beep is heard and a message dis-
- AUTOMATIC
Automatic application when the played if the parking brake has not
engine stops and automatic re- been applied.
lease on use of the accelerator
(automatic operation by default), IX
- MANUAL Before leaving the vehicle, Before leaving the vehicle,
Manual application / release of ! check that warning lamp P ! check that warning lamp P
the parking brake is always pos- and the warning lamp in the and the warning lamp in the
sible by pulling control lever A instrument panel are on fixed (not instrument panel are on fixed (not
while pressing the brake pedal. flashing). flashing).
Never leave a child alone inside the
vehicle with the ignition on, as they
could release the parking brake.

127
 DRIVING

Release Activation / Deactivation of the Manual operation

The electric parking brake releases automatic functions
automatically and progressively Depending on the country of sale, Manual application / release of the
when you press the accelerator: automatic application when switch- parking brake is always possible.
) with a manual gearbox (first ing off the engine and automatic
gear or reverse gear engaged), release when moving off can be de-
press down fully on the clutch activated. The activation / deactiva-
pedal then press on the accele- tion is done in the instrument panel
rator pedal and move off. screen configuration menu. Select
"Vehicle parameters / Comfort / Auto
) with an automatic gearbox, ac- parking brake".
celerate with the selector in posi-
tion D, M or R.
Deactivation of these func-
tions is signalled by this
warning lamp in the instru-
ment panel.
With the automatic functions deac-
Full release of the parking brake is tivated, the parking brake must be Application
confirmed by: applied and released manually. With the vehicle stationary, to apply the
- warning lamp P in the parking brake whether the engine is
control lever A going off, running or off, pull on control lever A.
The application of the parking brake
- this warning lamp in the in- is confirmed by:
strument panel going off,
IX ! In some special circumstanc-
es, with the engine not run- - warning lamp P in the con-
- display of a message "parking ning, (towing, icy conditions...) the trol lever A coming on,
brake off" in the instrument panel automatic parking brake can be
screen. released manually, with the key in - this warning lamp in the in-
When stationary, with the engine the running position. strument panel coming on,
running, do not press the accelera- - display of a message "parking
tor pedal unnecessarily (particularly brake on" in the instrument panel
when starting the engine, including screen.
in neutral), as you may release the
parking brake. If the configuration menu does not
have the option to activate / deac- When the driver’s door is opened
Do not place any object (packet of
cigarettes, telephone...) between
tivate the automatic functions, this
can be done by a CITROËN dealer
!with the engine running, a mes-
the gear lever and the electric park- sage is displayed accompanied
or a qualified workshop. by an audible signal if the parking
ing brake control.
brake has not been applied.
128
 DRIVING

Release Maximum application Particular situations

With the ignition on or the engine
running, to release the parking If necessary, you can utilise maxi- In certain situations (starting the en-
brake, press on the brake pedal, mum application of the parking gine...), the parking brake can auto-
push then release control lever A. brake. It is obtained by means of a matically alter its level of application.
long pull on control lever A, until This is normal operation.
you see the message "Max appli- To advance your vehicle a few cen-
cation of the parking brake" and a timetres without starting the engine,
The full application of the parking beep is heard.
brake is confirmed by: but with the ignition on, press on the
Maximum application is essen- brake pedal and release the parking
- warning lamp P in the tial: brake by pushing then releasing
control lever A going off, - in the case of a vehicle towing control lever A.
a caravan or a trailer, if the au- The full release of the parking brake
- this warning lamp in the in- tomatic functions are activated is confirmed by the warning lamp P
strument panel going off, but you are applying the parking in the control lever and the warning
brake manually, lamp in the instrument panel going
- display of a message "parking - when the effective gradient you off and the display of a message
brake released" in the instru- are parked on is variable (e.g. on "parking brake off" in the instrument
ment panel screen. a ferry, in a lorry, during towing). panel screen.
If you push control lever A without - In the case of towing, a loaded If the parking brake malfunctions
pressing the brake pedal, the park- vehicle or parking on a gradient, while applied or if the battery is flat,
ing brake will not be released and turn the front wheels towards the an emergency release is still pos-
the message "Foot on brake" will be pavement and engage a gear sible.
displayed in the instrument panel. when you park. To ensure correct operation of the
- After a maximum application, the parking brake and therefore your
release time will be longer. safety, the number of successive IX
When stationary, with the en- application/release operations is
! gine running, do not press the limited to eight.
accelerator pedal unneces- If this number is exceeded, you are
sarily, as you may release the warned by the message "Parking
parking brake. brake faulty" and a warning lamp
flashes.

129
 DRIVING

Dynamic emergency braking If a failure of the ESP sys- Emergency parking brake
tem is signalled by the light- release
ing of this warning lamp,
then braking stability is not
guaranteed. In this event, stability
must be assured by the driver by
repeating alternate "pull release" ac-
tions on control lever A.

! The dynamic emergency brak-

ing should only be used in ex-
ceptional circumstances.

In the event of the electric parking

In the event of a failure of the ve- brake failing to release, an emergen-
hicle’s main braking system or in cy device can be used to release the
an exceptional situation (e.g. driver parking brake manually, provided that
taken ill, under instruction, etc) pull ! If the vehicle cannot be im-
mobilised, do not operate it is possible to immobilise the vehicle
and hold control lever A to stop the the emergency release. Your ve- while the procedure is carried out.
vehicle. hicle may run away if on a slope. ) If you can start the vehicle: with
The electronic stability programme Contact a CITROËN dealer or a the engine running, immobilise
(ESP) provides stability during dy- qualified workshop. the vehicle by applying the foot
IX namic emergency braking. brake while the operation is be-
If there is a fault with the dynamic ing carried out.
emergency braking, one of the fol- ) If you are unable to start the ve-
lowing messages will be displayed hicle (flat battery for example):
in the instrument panel screen: do not use this device and con-
- "Parking brake faulty". tact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop. However, if
- "Parking brake control faulty". you are obliged to proceed, first
immobilise your vehicle securely
and then follow the instructions
below.

130
 DRIVING

This strap does not permit

! application of the parking
brake.
To re-engage the electric parking
brake (after rectifying the malfunc-
tion or battery failure), give a long
pull on the control A until the park-
ing brake warning lamp (!) flashes
in the instrument panel then give a
second long pull until this warning
lamp is on fixed.
The time required for the subse-
quent application may be longer
than during normal operation.
) On sloping ground: immobilise ) Release the strap from its loca-
the vehicle by placing the chocks tion C. It is essential that the ignition is
(if your vehicle has them) in front not switched on until the parking
) Pull the strap to release the brake has re-engaged (flashing of
or behind the two front wheels, brake. A loud knock confirms the
against the slope the warning lamp (!) in the instru-
release of the brake. ment panel then the warning lamp
On level ground: immobilise the ) Take care to put the strap on fixed) to avoid damage to the
vehicle by placing the chocks back in its location C correct- parking brake.
(if your vehicle has them) in ly. Otherwise, it will no longer
front and behind one of the front Take care not to allow moisture or
be possible to apply the brake. dust in the proximity of the diagnos-
wheels. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a tic socket D which is essential for
) Open the lower compartment of qualified workshop. the maintenance of your vehicle.
the centre armrest by pulling it. ) Put the rubber mat back in place IX
) Ensure that the cup holder B is on the base of the armrest.
folded away.
) Remove the rubber mat covering
the base of the armrest.

131
 DRIVING

Operating faults

! If any of these instances arises, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.

SITUATION CONSEQUENCES
Electric parking brake problem and display If the electric parking brake problem warning lamp and the service
of message "Parking brake faulty" and the warning lamp come on, position the vehicle in a safe location
following warning lamps: (on flat ground, with a gear engaged).

Display of the messages "Parking brake - The automatic functions are deactivated.
faulty" and "Anti roll-back fault" and of the - The hill start assist is not available.
following warning lamps:
- The electric parking brake is only available manually.
2

IX

Display of messages "Parking brake faulty" - Manual release of the electric parking brake is not available.
and "Anti roll-back fault" and of the - The hill start assist is not available.
following warning lamp:
- The automatic functions and manual application are still available.
3

132
 DRIVING

SITUATION CONSEQUENCES
Display of messages "Parking brake faulty" - The automatic functions are deactivated.
and "Anti roll-back fault" and of the - The hill start assist is not available.
following warning lamps: To apply the electric parking brake:
) Immobilise the vehicle and switch off the ignition
) Pull the control lever for at least 5 seconds or until maximum
application.
) Switch on the ignition and check that the electric parking brake
4 warning lamps are on.
- Application may take longer than in normal operation.
- If warning lamp (!) flashes or if the warning lamps do not come
on when the ignition is switched on, this method does not work.
and/or flashing Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
To release the electric parking brake:
) Switch on the ignition.
) Push the control lever and hold it for approximately 3 seconds.

Display of message "Parking brake control - Only the functions for automatic application on switching off
faulty – automatic mode activated" and the engine and automatic release on acceleration are
the following warning lamps: available.
5 - Manual application/release of the electric parking brake and
dynamic emergency braking are unavailable.
and/or flashing
IX
Display of message "Parking brake faulty" - Application of the parking brake is not guaranteed.
and of the following warning lamp: - The parking brake is temporarily unavailable.
It this situation arises:
) Wait approximately 3 minutes.
6 ) After 3 minutes, if the warning lamp is still flashing, try to
reinitialise the parking brake, either by pushing and releasing
flashing the control A while pressing the brake pedal or by means of a
long pull on control lever A.

Battery problem - Illumination of the battery warning lamp makes it essential to stop the
7 vehicle as soon as traffic allows. Stop and immobilise your vehicle.
- Apply the electric parking brake before switching off the engine.
133
 DRIVING

HILL START ASSIST Operation

System which keeps your vehicle

immobilised temporarily (approxi-
mately 2 seconds) when starting on
a gradient, the time to move your
foot from the brake pedal to the ac-
celerator pedal.
This function is only active when:
- the vehicle is completely station-
ary, with your foot on the brake
pedal,
- in certain conditions on a gradient,
On an ascending gradient, with On a descending gradient, with
- with the driver’s door closed. the vehicle stationary, the vehicle the vehicle stationary and reverse
The hill start assist function cannot is held for a brief moment when gear engaged, the vehicle is held
be deactivated. you release the brake pedal: for a brief moment when you re-
- provided you are in first gear or lease the brake pedal.
neutral on a manual gearbox,
- provided you are in D or M on an
automatic gearbox.

IX ! Do not exit the vehicle while

it is being held in the hill start
assist phase.
If you need to leave the vehicle with
the engine running, apply the park-
ing brake manually and ensure that
the parking brake warning lamp (in
the instrument panel) is on fixed
(not flashing).

134
 DRIVING

5-SPEED MANUAL GEARBOX 6-SPEED MANUAL GEARBOX

Starting the vehicle Engaging reverse gear Engaging reverse gear

) Check that the gear lever is in ) Move the gear lever to the right ) Raise the ring under the knob
neutral. then back. (indicated by the arrow) and
) Do not touch the accelerator. Only engage reverse gear when the push the gear lever to the left
vehicle is stationary with the engine then forwards.
) For Diesel engines: turn the
key to position M and wait until at idle. Only engage reverse gear when the
the pre-heating warning lamp vehicle is stationary with the engine
switches off if it has come on. at idle. IX
) Operate the starter, turning the
key until the engine starts (no
more than ten seconds).
) In temperatures lower than 0°C,
declutch while operating the
starter to facilitate starting. As a safety precaution and to facili-
tate starting of the engine:
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.

135
 DRIVING

GEAR EFFICIENCY Example: The information appears in the in-

INDICATOR* - You are in third gear. strument panel in the form of an ar-
row accompanied by the suggested
System which reduces fuel con- gear.
sumption by advising the driver to
change up on vehicles fitted with a
manual gearbox.

In the case of driving which

Operation
! makes particular demands on
- You press the accelerator pedal the performance of the engine
moderately. (firm pressure on the accelerator
The system intervenes only when pedal, for example, when overtak-
driving economically. ing...), the system will not recom-
Depending on the driving situation mend a gear change.
and your vehicle's equipment, the The system never suggests:
system may advise you to skip one
or more gears. You can follow this - engaging first gear,
instruction without engaging the in- - engaging reverse gear,
termediate gears. - engaging a lower gear.
The gear engagement recommen-
dations must not be considered
compulsory. In fact, the configu- - The system may suggest that
ration of the road, the amount of you engage a higher gear, if ap-
traffic and safety remain determin- propriate.
IX ing factors when choosing the best
gear. Therefore, the driver remains
responsible for deciding whether or
not to follow the advice given by the
system.
This function cannot be deactivated.

* According to engine.
136
 DRIVING

6-SPEED ELECTRONIC Mode selection Steering mounted control paddles

GEARBOX SYSTEM
Six-speed electronic gearbox sys-
tem which offers a choice between
the comfort of fully automatic opera-
tion or the pleasure of manual gear
changing.
There are two driving modes:
- automatic operation for elec-
tronic control of the gears by the
gearbox,
- manual operation for sequential
gear changing by the driver,
In automated mode, it remains pos-
sible to change gear manually by
using the steering mounted control
paddles, when overtaking, for ex-
ample. ) automatic mode: gear lever in +. Change up paddle to the right of
position A, the steering wheel.
A SPORT programme is available in
automated mode, providing a more ) manual mode: gear lever in posi- ) Press the back of the "+" steer-
dynamic driving style. tion M, ing mounted paddle to change
) SPORT mode: gear lever in po- up a gear.
sition A and a press on button 1. -. Change down paddle to the left of
the steering wheel.
) Press the back of the "-" steering IX
mounted paddle to change down
a gear.

The steering mounted paddles

cannot be used to select neutral
or to engage or disengage reverse
gear.

137
 DRIVING

Displays in the instrument panel Moving off Reverse

) To start the engine, the gear le- ) With your foot on the brake, push
ver must be in position N. the lever forwards.
) Press the brake pedal down fully.
) Operate the starter. Only engage reverse with
N appears in the instrument panel the vehicle immobilised.
screen. To avoid any jerking, wait a
moment before accelerating.
The position of the gear lever the the
driving mode are displayed in dial C
of the instrument panel.
A selection grille alongside the gear
lever also allows you to see the se-
lected position. N flashes in the instrument panel,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message in the multifunction
screen, if the gear lever is not in Neutral
position N on starting.
Never select position N with
the vehicle moving.

) Select first gear (position M or A)

or reverse (position R).
IX ) Release the parking brake un-
less it is programmed in auto-
matic mode.
) Release the brake pedal, then
accelerate.

138
 DRIVING

Automatic operation Manual gear changing The gear change requests are only
carried out if the engine speed per-
This selective gear change mode mits.
enables you to overtake, for exam- It is not necessary to release the ac-
ple, while still remaining in automat- celerator during gear changes.
ic mode.
When braking or slowing down, the
) Operate the + or - steering gearbox changes down automati-
mounted control paddle. cally to allow vehicle to accelerate in
The gearbox engages the gear re- the correct gear.
quested if the engine speed per- The SPORT programme is inopera-
mits. tive with sequential operation.
After a few moments without any
action on the controls, the gearbox
resumes automatic control of the
gears.

Manual operation On sharp acceleration, the gear-

) Select position A. box will not change up unless the
The gearbox continuously selects driver acts on the gear lever or the
the most suitable gear, depending steering mounted paddles.
on the: Never select neutral N while the
- style of driving, vehicle is moving.
- profile of the road, Only engage reverse gear R when
- vehicle loading. the vehicle is immobilised with the IX
brake pedal pressed.

For optimum acceleration, for ex-

ample when overtaking another ve-
hicle, press the accelerator pedal
firmly past the point of resistance.

) Select position M.

139
 DRIVING

SPORT programme Stopping the vehicle Operating fault

Before switching off the engine, you With the ignition on, the flashing of
can choose to: AUTO, accompanied by an audible
- move to position N to engage signal and a message in the mul-
neutral, tifunction screen, indicates a fault
with the gearbox.
- leave the gear engaged; in this
case, it will not be possible to Have it checked by a CITROËN
move the vehicle. dealer or a qualified workshop.
In both cases, you must apply the park-
ing brake to immobilise the vehicle. You must press the brake pedal
when starting the engine.
Whatever the circumstances, you
must manually apply the parking
brake when parking, unless the
parking brake is programmed in au-
tomatic mode.
) Wit the gear lever at A and the
engine running, press button S to When immobilising the ve-
activate the SPORT programme,
which provides a more dynamic
! hicle, with the engine running,
you must place the gear lever
driving style. in neutral N.
S appears in the instrument panel. Before carrying out any work in the
IX engine compartment, check that
the gear lever is in neutral N and
) Press the S button again to that the parking brake is applied.
switch it off.
S then disappears from the instru-
ment panel screen.

140
 DRIVING

STOP & START If your vehicle is fitted Special cases: STOP mode not
with the system, a time available
The Stop & Start system puts the en- counter calculates the STOP mode is not invoked when:
gine temporarily into standby - STOP sum of the periods in
mode - during stops in the traffic STOP mode during a journey. It rests - the driver's door is open,
(red lights, traffic jams, or other...). itself to zero every time the ignition - the driver's seat belt is not fas-
The engine restarts automatically - is switched on with the key. tened,
START mode - as soon as you want - the vehicle has not exceeded
to move off. The restart takes place 6 mph (10 km/h) since the last
instantly, quickly and silently. engine start using the key,
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & - the electric parking brake is ap-
Start system reduces fuel consump- For your comfort, during parking plied or being applied,
tion and exhaust emissions as well maoeuvres, STOP mode is not
available for a few seconds after - the engine is needed to maintain
as the noise level when stationary. a comfortable temperature in the
coming out of reverse gear.
passenger compartment,
STOP mode does not affect the func-
tionality of the vehicle, such as for ex- - demisting is active,
ample, braking, power steering... - some special conditions (battery
charge, engine temperature,
Operation braking assistance, ambient
temperature...) where the engine
Going into engine STOP mode is needed to assure control of a
system.

The "ECO" warning lamp comes

on in the instrument panel and ! Never refuel with the engine
in STOP mode; you must In this case, the "ECO"
the engine goes into standby: switch off the ignition with the warning lamp flashes for a IX
key. few seconds then goes off.
- with the electronic gearbox
system, at speeds below 4 mph
(6 km/h), press the brake pedal or This operation is perfectly normal.
put the gear lever in position N.

141
 DRIVING

Going into engine START mode Special cases: START invoked Deactivation
automatically
The "ECO" warning lamp goes START mode is invoked automati-
off and the engine starts with cally when:
the electronic gearbox sys- - the driver's door is open,
tem: - the driver's seat belt is not fas-
- gear lever in position A or M, re- tened,
lease the brake pedal, - the speed of the vehicle exceeds
- or gear lever in position N and the 7 mph (11 km/h) with the elec-
brake pedal released, move the tronic gearbox system,
gear lever to position A or M, - the electric parking brake is being
- or engage reverse gear. applied,
- some special conditions (battery
charge, engine temperature,
braking assistance, ambient tem- At any time, press the "ECO
perature...) where the engine is OFF" switch to deactivate the sys-
needed for control of a system. tem.
This is confirmed by the switch warn-
ing lamp coming on accompanied by
a message in the screen.

If the system has been deactivated

In this case the "ECO" in STOP mode, the engine restarts
warning lamp flashes for a immediately.
IX few seconds, then goes off.

This operation is perfectly normal. Reactivation

Press the "ECO OFF" switch again.
The system is active again; this is
confirmed by the switch warning
lamp going off and a message in the
screen.

The system is reactivated auto-

matically at every new start using
the key.
142
 DRIVING

Operating fault Maintenance

Before doing anything under

! the bonnet, deactivate the
Stop & Start system to avoid
any risk of injury resulting from au-
tomatic operation of START mode.

This system requires a 12 V battery

with a special specification and tech-
nology (reference numbers available
from CITROËN dealers).
Fitting a battery not listed by
In the event of a fault with the sys- CITROËN introduces the risk of mal-
tem, the "ECO OFF" switch warning function of the system.
lamp flashes then comes on con-
tinuously. To charge the battery, use a 12 V
charger and observe the polarity.
Have it checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
In the event of a fault in STOP mode,
the vehicle may stall: all the instru-
ment panel warning lamps come on.
It is then necessary to switch off the
ignition and start the engine again IX
using the key.

! The Stop & Start system

makes use of advanced tech-
nology. For any work on the sys-
tem go to a qualified workshop with
the skills and equipment required,
which a CITROËN dealer is able to
provide.

143
 DRIVING

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX Mode selection Displays in the instrument panel

The position of the gear lever and

the driving mode are displayed in
the instrument panel dial C.
A position grille associated with the
gear lever allows you to view the se-
lected position.

Automatic gearbox which offers a ) automatic mode: gear lever in

choice between the comfort of fully position D,
For safety:
automatic operation, enhanced by
the sport and snow programmes, or
) manual mode: gear lever in posi-
tion M,
! - position P can be disen-
manual gear changing. gaged only if you press
) SPORT mode: gear lever in po- the brake pedal,
Four driving modes are provided: sition D and button A pressed,
- automatic operation for elec- - when a door is opened, an au-
IX tronic control of the gears by the
) SNOW mode: gear lever in posi-
tion D and button B pressed.
dible signal is heard if the gear
gearbox, lever is not in position P,
- the SPORT programme for a - always make sure that the gear
more dynamic driving style, lever is in position P before you
leave your vehicle.
- the SNOW programme to im-
prove driving when the grip is If the gearbox is in position P but the
poor, position of the gear lever is different,
reposition the gear lever on P so that
- manual operation for sequen- you can start the vehicle.
tial changing of the gears by the
driver.

144
 DRIVING

Moving off Park Reverse gear

) To start the engine, the gear le- This position of the gear le- Only engage this position
ver must be in position P or N. ver is used to prevent the when the vehicle is station-
) Operate the starter. vehicle from moving when ary. To prevent snatching,
you are stationary. do not accelerate too soon
) When the engine is running, after selection.
place the gear lever on R, D ) To select position P, move the
or M as required. gear lever back to the highest
position (towards R), then push
) Check, in the instrument panel, it forwards and then to the left.
the position engaged. Neutral
) To exit position P, move the gear
) Release the brake pedal and ac- lever to the right and then to the
celerate. position you want. Never select position N if
) To avoid a possible difference the vehicle is moving.
) Only engage this position when
between the position of the gear the vehicle is completely sta-
lever and the actual position of tionary. In this position, the front
the gearbox, always exit from wheels are locked. Make sure
position P with the ignition on that the gear lever is correctly
and brake pedal applied. positioned.
Never select positions P or R
Otherwise, when the ignition is on or
the engine is running: ! if the vehicle is not stationary.
) reposition the gear lever in posi- If, while the vehicle is moving, po-
tion P, sition N is engaged inadvertently,
allow the engine to idle before en-
) put your foot on the brake ped- gaging position D or M.
al and then select the gear you IX
want.

145
 DRIVING

Automatic operation When braking, the gearbox may - If the vehicle stops or reduces
change down automatically in order speed (for example when ap-
to provide effective engine braking. proaching a stop sign), the gear-
If you lift your foot off the accelera- box changes down automatically
tor abruptly, the gearbox will not en- to first gear.
gage a higher gear. - In sequential mode, it is not nec-
essary to release the accelerator
during gear changes.
- A request to change gear is ac-
cepted only if the engine speed
permits it.
Manual operation
- The SPORT and SNOW modes
do not operate in sequential
mode.

) Move the gear lever to position D.

The gearbox constantly selects
the gear that is best suited to the
following parameters:
- driving style,
- road profile
IX - vehicle load.
The gearbox operates without requir-
ing any intervention on your part.
For certain manoeuvres (for ex- Position of the gear lever for manual
ample overtaking), you can obtain gear changing.
maximum acceleration by pressing ) Move the gear lever to position M.
the accelerator pedal hard down
past the point of resistance, which ) Push the gear lever towards the
then produces an automatic change "+" sign to change up a gear.
down to a lower gear. ) Pull the gear lever towards the "-"
sign to change down a gear.

146
 DRIVING

SPORT and SNOW SNOW programme "7"

A strong snatch may be felt
programmes ) With the gear lever in position D
and the engine running, press
! when selecting R for reverse
gear.
button B.
In the event of a fault, the gearbox is
The gearbox adapts to driving on blocked in one gear; do not exceed
slippery roads. a speed of 62 mph (100 km/h).
This programme makes moving off Do not turn off the engine while the
easier and improves traction in con- gear selector is in position D or R.
ditions of poor grip.
Never press the accelerator and
brake pedals simultaneously. Braking
7 appears in the instrument and acceleration should be done
panel. with the right foot only. Pressing both
pedals simultaneously may damage
the gearbox.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Return to automatic operation
These two special programmes sup- ) At any time, press the button se-
plement the automatic operation in lected again to exit from the pro-
very particular conditions of use. gramme engaged and return to
auto-adaptive mode.

SPORT programme "S" IX

) With the gear lever in po-
sition D and the engine
running, press button A.

The gearbox automatically favours a

dynamic driving style.
S appears in the instrument panel.

147
 DRIVING

FIXED CENTRED CONTROLS STEERING WHEEL

- Scroll the various pages of information on the instrument panel
Rotation screen.
- Move through the various menus on the instrument panel screen.
- Increase/decrease values.
1
- Open the menu on the instrument panel screen (only when stationary).
Short press - Select and confirm information.
Trip computer zero reset (if the trip computer page is
Long press displayed).
- Cancel the current operation.
Short press
2 - Return to the previous screen on the instrument panel screen.
Long press Return to the initial page on the instrument panel screen.
Short press Increase the speed in steps of 1 mph (1 km/h) / storing the speed.
3
Maintained press Increase the speed in steps of 5 mph (5 km/h).
Short press Decrease the speed in steps of 1 mph (1 km/h) / storing the speed.
4
Maintained press Decrease the speed in steps of 5 mph (5 km/h).
Suspend or resume cruise control/speed limiter (depending
5 Short press on the mode selected).
Select cruise control or speed limiter mode (the cycle on this
6 Short press button will always begin with selection of the speed limiter).
IX 7 Short press Deactivate cruise control/speed limiter.
- Pick up an incoming call.
- Hang up the current call.
Short press
8 - Open the telephone short-cut menu.
- Confirm on the list and the telephone menu.
Long press Refuse an incoming call.
9 Short press / Long press Horn.
10 Short press Activate/deactivate Black Panel mode (night driving).
Short press Activate the voice command.
11
Long press Navigation instruction repeat.

148
 DRIVING

- Radio source: Scroll the pre-set stations.

- CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Scroll the
Rotation CDs or directories.
- On the multifunction screen menus: Movement and
increase/decrease.
12
- On the multifunction screen menus: confirm.
Short press - Open the short-cut menus (depending on the
multifunction screen page).
Long press Open the multifunction screen main menu.
Cancel the current operation and return to the previous page
Short press on the multifunction screen.
13 When an incoming telephone call is received: Refuse the call.
Long press Return to the initial page on the multifunction screen.
14 Short press Access to the multifunction screen general menu.
15 Short press / Maintained press Volume increase.
16 Short press / Maintained press Volume decrease.
- First press: mute.
17 Short press - Second press: restore sound.
- Radio source: Automatic search of higher frequencies.
Short press - CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Search for the next track.
18
Maintained press - CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Fast forward play.
IX
- Radio source: Automatic search of lower frequencies.
Short press - CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Search for
19 the previous track.
Maintained press CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Fast backwards.
- Radio source: display the list of radio stations available.
- CD/MP3 CD and CD changer source: display the list of
Short press
20 CD tracks and directories.
- Jukebox source: display the list of albums.
Long press Update the list of radio stations.
21 Short press / Long press Horn.
22 Short press MODE: selection of the type of information presented on the multifunction screen.
149
 DRIVING

SPEED LIMITER Displays in the instrument panel

System which prevents the vehi-
cle from exceeding the speed pro-
grammed by the driver.
When the limit speed is reached, the
accelerator pedal no longer has any
effect.
The speed limiter is switched on man-
ually: a speed of at least 20 mph (ap-
prox. 30 km/h) must be programmed. The speed limiter information is dis- Successive presses will modify the
The speed limiter can in no way re- played in zone A of the instrument maximum speed in steps of 1 mph
place respect for speed limits or vigi- panel. and a continuous press in steps of
lance and responsibility on the part 5 mph.
of the driver.
Programming
) Press on button 4 to select speed Activation
limiter mode "LIMIT".
Steering mounted controls The selection is confirmed by the
display of the function in zone A of
the instrument panel.
) Press on button 3 when the de-
sired maximum speed is dis-
played.
IX The information "ON" then appears
in zone A.
When the function is selected, the
last memorised speed and the infor-
mation "PAUSE" are displayed.
With the engine running, you can ad-
just the memorised maximum speed,
displayed in zone A, by pressing on:
The speed limiter switches are lo- ) Button 1 to increase the memo-
cated on the left-hand side of the rised maximum speed.
steering wheel.
) Button 2 to decrease the memo-
rised maximum speed.

150
 DRIVING

Return to normal driving

) Either press on button 5.
) Or select the speed limiter func-
tion.
Overriding the programmed ) Or stop the engine.
speed
The accelerator pedal has an end-
of-travel switch. In order to exceed
the memorised maximum speed at Operating fault
any time, you can press the pedal
all the way down. While the speed If there is a fault, a message is
Suspension / Resumption is being exceeded, the speed dis- displayed accompanied by an au-
played in zone A will flash. You have dible signal and illumination of the
) Press on button 3. only to release the accelerator pedal SERVICE warning lamp.
This action causes the information to return below the maximum speed, Have it checked by a CITROËN
"PAUSE" to appear in zone A of the to restore the function. dealer or a qualified workshop.
instrument panel. The speed will also flash if the speed
limiter is not able to prevent the vehi-
cle from exceeding the programmed
speed (e.g. on a steep descent or
under excessive acceleration).
To reactivate the speed limiter, re- In the event of a steep descent or
This action does not cancel the lease the accelerator to slow to a under excessive acceleration, the
memorised maximum speed which speed lower than the programmed speed limiter (which does not act
remains displayed in zone A of the speed. on the brakes) may not be able to
IX
instrument panel. prevent the vehicle from exceeding
the programmed speed.
Use of a floor mat other than that
recommended by CITROËN may
affect the normal operation of the
accelerator pedal and hamper the
operation of the speed limiter.
Floor mats approved by CITROËN
are fitted with a 3rd fixing located in
the pedal area to avoid any risk of
interference with the pedals.

151
 DRIVING

CRUISE CONTROL Displays in the instrument Once the desired speed has been
panel reached using the accelerator, press
System which automatically main- button 1 or button 2. The cruising
tains the vehicle speed programmed speed is then memorised and cruise
by the driver, without any action on control is activated. The cruising
the accelerator pedal. speed is displayed in zone A of the
The cruise control is switched on instrument panel, and "ON" is dis-
manually: the vehicle speed must be played.
at least 25 mph (40 km/h) and you
must be in at least:
- 4th gear for manual gearboxes,
- 2nd gear for automatic gearboxes. The programmed information is
grouped together in zone A of the
instrument panel. You can then release the accelera-
tor pedal. The vehicle will automati-
cally keep to the speed chosen.
The vehicle speed may vary slightly
Programming from that memorised.
) Press button 4 to select cruise If during cruise control the system
Steering mounted controls cannot keep to the cruise speed
control mode "CRUISE".
(e.g. on a steep descent), then the
speed flashes. If necessary, brake to
curb your speed.

IX Adjustment of the memorised

The selection is confirmed by the speed while cruise control is
display of the function in zone A of in operation
the instrument panel.
You can adjust the memorised
When the function is selected, no speed, displayed in zone A, by
cruising speed has yet been pressing:
memorised.
- Button 1 to increase the speed.
The cruise control switches are lo-
cated on the left-hand side of the - Button 2 to reduce the speed.
steering wheel. Successive presses will modify the
cruise speed in steps of 1 mph and a
continuous press in steps of 5 mph.

152
 DRIVING

Overriding the programmed Reactivation Operating fault

speed
- By recalling the memorised If there is a fault, a message is
While cruise control is in operation, speed displayed accompanied by an au-
it is always possible to go above the After deactivation, press button 3. dible signal and illumination of the
programmed speed simply by press- Your vehicle automatically returns SERVICE warning lamp.
ing the accelerator pedal (for exam- to the memorised cruising speed. Have it checked by a CITROËN
ple to overtake another vehicle). The memorised speed and "ON" dealer or a qualified workshop.
The speed displayed in zone A are displayed in zone A.
flashes. If the memorised cruising speed
You only have to release the ac- is higher than the current speed,
celerator pedal to return to the pro- the vehicle will accelerate strong-
grammed speed. ly to reach the current speed.
- By selecting the current speed
Cruise control must only be
Suspension / Resumption
Press button 1 or 2 once the de-
sired speed has been reached. ! used where the traffic condi-
The new speed and "ON" will tions permit driving at a con-
) Either by pressing the brake appear in zone A. stant speed.
pedal or the clutch pedal. Do not use it on congested roads
) Or by pressing button 3. or when the weather or the road
) Or by the ESP or ASR systems conditions are poor.
being active. The driver must remain attentive and
For vehicles with a manual gearbox, in complete control of the vehicle.
cruise control is deactivated if the You are recommended to keep your
gear lever is in neutral. feet within range of the pedals.
IX
Return to normal driving
) Either press on button 5.
) Or select the cruise control func-
tion.
"PAUSE" will be displayed in zone A ) Or stop the engine.
of the instrument panel.
The speed that was chosen is no
These actions do not cancel the longer memorised.
cruising speed which remains dis-
played on the instrument panel.

153
 DRIVING

LANE DEPARTURE
WARNING SYSTEM
System which detects the involun-
tary crossing of longitudinal traffic
lane markings on the ground (solid
or broken line).
Sensors, fitted below the front
bumper, trigger a warning if the vehi-
cle drifts over a lane marking (speed
higher than 50 mph (80 km/h)).

This system is particularly useful on

motorways and main roads.

The lane departure warning sys-

tem cannot, in any circumstances,
replace the need for vigilance and
responsibility on the part of the Detection Operating fault
driver.
You are warned by the vibration of In the event of a malfunction, the
IX the driver's seat cushion: service warning lamp comes on, ac-
- on the right-hand side, if the companied by an audible signal and
marking on the ground has been a message in the screen.
Activation
crossed on the right, Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
) Press this button, the indicator - on the left-hand side, if the mark- qualified workshop.
lamp comes on. ing on the ground has been
crossed on the left. The detection may be impeded:
No warning is transmitted while the - if the sensors are dirty (mud,
Deactivation direction indicator is active and for snow...),
approximately 20 seconds after the - if the markings on the ground
) Press this button again, the indi- direction indicator is switched off. are worn,
cator lamp goes off.
A warning may be transmitted if a direc- - if there is little contrast between
The status of the system remains tion marking (e.g. arrow) or non-stand- the markings on the ground and
in the memory when the ignition is ard marking (e.g. graffiti) is crossed. the road surface.
switched off.
154
 DRIVING

PARKING SPACE SENSOR

System which measures the park- Displays in the instrument You can select the "parking space sen-
ing space available between two panel sor" function by pressing button A. The
vehicles or obstacles. It measures fixed illumination of the warning lamp
the size of the space and gives you The parking space sensor function indicates that the function is selected.
information on: warning lamp can have three differ- During the measurement, the mes-
- the possibility of fitting into a free ent states: sage "Measurement in progress -
space, depending on the dimensions - off: the function is not selected, Vmax 20 km/h (12 mph)" is displayed
of your vehicle and the distances - on fixed: the function is selected in the instrument panel screen.
necessary for your manoeuvring,
- the level of difficulty of the ma-
but the conditions for measuring IX
are not yet met (direction indi-
noeuvre to be performed. cator not operating, speed too
The system does not measure spaces high) or the measurement is ter-
which are clearly much smaller or larger minated.
than the size of the vehicle. - flashing: measurement is in
progress or the message is be-
ing displayed.

155
 DRIVING

Operation The function displays the following The function deselects itself auto-
types of message: matically:
You have identified a parking space: - when you engage reverse gear,
) Press button A to select the func- - when you switch off the ignition,
tion.
- if measurement is not requested,
) Activate the direction indicator
on the side where the space is to - within five minutes of selection of
be measured. the function,
) During measurement, go for- - if the vehicle speed exceeds the
ward the length of the space, at threshold of 45 mph (approx.
Parking YES 70 km/h) for one minute.
a speed less than 12 mph (ap-
prox. 20 km/h), to prepare for If the lateral distance between your
your manoeuvre. vehicle and the parking space is too
large, the system may not be able to
measure the space.
The function remains available after
The system then measures the size each measurement and thus can
of the space. measure more than one space dur-
ing your search.
Parking DIFFICULT In bad weather conditions or in
winter, make sure that the sensors
are not covered by dirt, or by ice or
snow.
The parking space sensor function
deactivates the front parking sen-
IX sors during space measurement
) The system informs you of the when you are in forward gear.
level of difficulty of the manoeu-
vre via a message in the instru- Parking NO
ment panel screen accompanied
by an audible signal.
) Depending on the message is-
sued by the system, you may or
may not be able to perform the
manoeuvre.
If there is a fault, have the system
checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.

156
 DRIVING

VISUAL AND AUDIBLE The parking sensors are switched on:

FRONT AND/OR REAR - by engaging reverse gear, The parking sensors system can-
PARKING SENSORS - at a speed below 6 mph (10 km/h) not, in any circumstances, replace
in forward gear. the need for vigilance and respon-
System consisting of proximity sen- sibility on the part of the driver.
sors, installed in the front and/or rear This is accompanied by an audible
bumper. signal and/or displaying of the vehi-
cle on the multifunction screen. Deactivation
It detects any obstacle (person, vehi-
cle, tree, barrier...) located in front of The proximity information is indicated by: ) Press button A, the warning lamp
or behind the vehicle, however, it will - an audible signal which be- comes on, the system is fully de-
not be able to detect obstacles loca- comes more rapid as the vehicle activated.
ted immediately below the bumper. approaches the obstacle, The system will be deactivated au-
An object, such as a stake, a road- - a diagram on the multifunction tomatically when a trailer is being
works cone or any other similar ob- display, with blocks which move towed or when a bicycle carrier is
ject may be detected at the start of closer to the vehicle. fitted (vehicle fitted with a towbar
the manoeuvre but may no longer The obstacle is located in relation to or bicycle carrier recommended by
be detected when the vehicle moves the emission of the audible signal by CITROËN).
nearer to it. the speakers; front or rear and right
or left.
When the distance between the ve-
hicle and the obstacle is less than
approximately thirty centimetres, the
audible signal becomes continuous
and/or the "Danger" symbol appears,
depending on the multifunction screen
version. IX

The parking sensors are switched

off:
- when you exit reverse gear,
- when the speed is higher than
6 mph (10 km/h) in forward gear,
- when the vehicle has been station-
ary for more than three seconds in
forward gear.

157
 DRIVING

Reactivation REVERSING CAMERA

(TOURER)

The blue lines represent the general

direction of the vehicle.
) Press button A again, the warning The red lines represent a distance
lamp switches off, the system is A reversing camera is activated au- of about 30 cm beyond the edge
reactivated. tomatically when reverse gear is en- of your vehicle's rear bumper. The
gaged. audible signal becomes continuous
The colour image is provided in the from this limit.
navigation screen. The green lines represent distances
of about 1 and 2 metres beyond the
In bad weather or in winter, ensure edge of your vehicle's rear bumper.
that the sensors are not covered
with mud, ice or snow. When re-
IX verse gear is engaged, an audible
signal (long beep) indicates that the
sensors may be dirty.
Clean the reversing camera regu-
When the speed of the vehicle is larly using a sponge and a soft
below about 6 mph (10 km/h), some cloth.
sources of noise (motorcycle, lorry,
pneumatic drill, ...) may trigger the
audible parking sensor signals.

The space between the blue lines

represents the width of your vehicle
except for the door mirrors.
158
 DRIVING

"HYDRACTIVE III +" Display in the instrument Vehicle positions

ELECTRONIC SUSPENSION panel
The suspension mode selected is
displayed in the instrument panel
screen.
Normal mode

This mode favours soft

damping for maximum com-
fort.
If the speed authorised for a
particular position is exceed-
ed, the vehicle reverts automatically
to the normal road position.

Position changes may only be

The suspension automatically and made when the engine is running.
instantly adjusts to different driving The adjustable ground clearance
styles and to the profile of the road, SPORT mode meets all types of situation. Apart
providing the best compromise be- from a few specific situations, the
tween occupant comfort and vehicle This mode favours dynamic vehicle should be in the Normal po-
road holding. driving. sition.
The system alternates between soft The warning lamp on button A ) Press once on one of the adjust-
and firm suspension settings, maxi- comes on in addition to the mes- ment controls. IX
mising comfort at the same time as sage in the instrument panel The change in position is indicated
constantly ensuring the highest level screen. by a message on the instrument
of safety. It also automatically cor- SPORT mode is retained when you panel screen.
rects ride height, according to the switch off the engine.
vehicle load and driving conditions.
In addition, the "Hydractive III +" sys-
tem allows you to choose between
two modes of suspension.
A change of suspension mode can
be made either when the vehicle is
moving or when stationary, by press-
ing button A.

159
 DRIVING

Request not granted

High position Normal position

Changing a wheel (not possible if If the speed authorised for a particu- The instrument panel screen tempo-
speed > 6mph (10 km/h)). lar position is exceeded, the vehicle rarily displays a message indicating
reverts automatically to the normal that this position is not authorised.
position.
The vehicle remains in the authorised
position and the instrument panel
screen indicates this position to you.
Automatic variation of ground clear-
ance
- If your speed exceeds 70 mph (ap-
prox. 110 km/h), on a good road sur-
face, ground clearance is lowered.
The vehicle returns to its normal
position if the road surface deterio-
rates or if your speed is lower than
IX Mid-high position Low position 55 mph (approx. 90 km/h).
For increased ground clearance (not To facilitate loading or unloading the - At low or medium speed, if the
possible if speed > 25 mph (40 km/h)). vehicle. road surface is poor, ground
For use on difficult roads when trav- For workshop inspections. clearance is increased. The ve-
elling at reduced speed, as well as hicle returns to its normal posi-
Not to be used in normal driving (not tion as soon as conditions allow.
on car park ramps. possible if speed > 6mph (10 km/h)).
- On switching off the ignition, the
ground clearance is reduced to
the parking position.

For your safety if you are operating

underneath the vehicle, you must
support the vehicle with axle stands.
160
 CHECKS

Partners in performance and

protecting the environment
Innovation in the search for
performance
For over 40 year, the TOTAL Research and
Development departments have developed for
CITROËN, lubricants to match the latest tech-
nical innovations on CITROËN vehicles, both
for competition and for everyday motoring.
For you, this is an assurance that you will
obtain of the best performance for your en-
gine.

Optimum protection for your

engine
By having your CITROËN vehicle
serviced with TOTAL lubricants, you
are contributing towards improving
the life and performances of your
engine, while also protecting the
environment.

prefers

161
 CHECKS

BONNET
When the engine is hot, handle the
Opening safety catch and bonnet stay with
care (risk of burns).
The location of the interior release
Before doing anything un- lever prevents opening of the bon-
! der the bonnet, switch off the net while the left hand front door is
closed.
Stop & Start system to avoid
any risk of injury resulting from an This operation must only be carried
automatic change to START mode. out when the vehicle is stationary.
Avoid opening the bonnet in strong
winds.

) At the front of the bonnet, lift the Closing

safety catch B and raise the bonnet.
) Take the stay out of the support
notch.
) Clip the stay in its housing.
) Lower the bonnet then slam it
firmly at the end of its travel.
) Pull on the bonnet to check that
it is fully closed.

) Open the left hand front door.

) Pull the interior bonnet release
lever A, located at the bottom of
the door frame.

) Unclip the stay C from its housing

and pivot it to insert it in the notch D
indicated by a yellow arrow.
) Fix the stay in the notch to hold
the bonnet open.

162
 CHECKS

BLEEDING THE DIESEL FUEL Refitting Bleeding water from the fuel
FILTER ) Firstly clip in at 2. filter
Protective cover ) Lower and centre the cover.
) Clip in at 3 and 4, pushing verti-
cally and gently from the rear.
) Clip in at 1 pushing vertically.

Bleed regularly (at each oil change).

To bleed the water, slacken the bleed
screw or the water in diesel fuel sen-
Removing the cover sor, located at the base of the filter.
Continue until all the water has
flowed out.
HDi 140 engine
Then tighten the bleed screw or the
) Remove the protective cover by water detection sensor.
first unclipping at 3, then 1 and 4.
) Unclip at 2 by pulling towards
you, then lift up.

HDi 115, HDi 160 and V6 HDi 240

engines
) Pull the protective cover upwards
to remove it.

163
 CHECKS

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL If the engine fails to start at the first

(DIESEL) attempt, wait fifteen seconds before
trying again.
If the engine fails to start after a few
attempts, operate the priming pump
again and then try to start the en-
gine.
When the engine is idling, accelerate
slightly to complete the bleeding of
the circuit.

V6 HDi 240 engine with electric

pump
HDi 115 engine HDi 140 and HDi 160 engines In the event of running out of fuel:
) after adding fuel, turn the ignition
) Unclip the protective cover to gain ) Unclip the protective cover to gain key to position M, wait for a few
access to the priming pump. access to the priming pump. seconds,
) operate the starter motor until
the engine starts.
Priming the fuel system If the engine fails to start after sev-
eral attempts, contact a CITROËN
In the event of running out of fuel: dealer or a qualified workshop.
) after filling (minimum 5 litres) and
removing the protective cover,
X operate the manual priming pump,
until some resistance is felt,
) operate the starter motor while
HDi engines make use of ad-
depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly until the engine starts. ! vanced technology.
For any work on your vehicle, con-
tact a qualified workshop that has
the skills and equipment required,
which a CITROËN dealer is able to
provide.

164
 CHECKS

PETROL ENGINES
The various caps and covers allow
access for checking fluid levels and
for replacing certain components.
1. Screenwash and headlamp wash
reservoir.
2. Power steering fluid reservoir or
power steering and suspension
fluid reservoir.
3. Engine coolant header tank.
4. Engine oil dipstick.
5. Engine oil filler cap.
6. Brake fluid reservoir.
7. Battery.
1.6i THP
8. Air filter.

1.6i VTi
165
 CHECKS

1. Screenwash and headlamp wash

reservoir.
2. Power steering fluid reservoir or
power steering and suspension
fluid reservoir.
3. Engine coolant header tank.
4. Engine oil dipstick.
5. Engine oil filler cap.
6. Brake fluid reservoir.
7. Battery.
8. Air filter.

2.0i 16V

Vehicles fitted with the 2.0i 16v

! engine may be fitted with metal
spring suspension. In this case,
a different power steering fluid reser-
voir is fitted.

166
 CHECKS

DIESEL ENGINES
The various caps and covers allow
access for checking fluid levels, for
replacing certain components and
for priming the fuel system.
1. Screenwash and headlamp wash
reservoir.
2. Power steering fluid reservoir or
power steering and suspension
fluid reservoir, depending on
equipment.
3. Engine coolant header tank.
4. Engine oil dipstick.
5. Engine oil filler cap.
6. Air filter.
7. Brake fluid reservoir.
HDi 115 / e-HDi 115 8. Battery.

X
As the Diesel fuel system op-
! erates under high pressure,
any work on the fuel system
is prohibited.
Vehicles fitted with the HDi 140 en-
gine may be fitted with metal spring
suspension. In this case, a differ-
ent power steering fluid reservoir is
fitted.
HDi 140
167
 CHECKS

HDi 160 - HDi 200 engines

(with particle emissions filter)

1. Screenwash and headlamp wash

reservoir.
2. Power steering and suspension
fluid reservoir.
3. Engine coolant header tank.
4. Engine oil dipstick.
5. Engine oil filler cap.
6. Air filter.
7. Brake fluid reservoir.
8. Battery.

HDi 160

As the Diesel fuel system ope-

X ! rates under high pressure:
- All work on the fuel system is
prohibited.
- HDi engines make use of ad-
vanced technology.
All maintenance and repairs require
special qualifications which only a
CITROËN dealer can guarantee.

HDi 200
168
 CHECKS

V6 HDi 240 engine

(with particle emissions filter)

1. Screenwash and headlamp wash

reservoir.
2. Power steering and suspension
fluid reservoir.
3. Engine coolant header tank.
4. Engine oil dipstick.
5. Engine oil filler cap.
6. Air filter.
7. Brake fluid reservoir.
8. "+" and "-" terminals for emergency
starting with a slave battery.

V6 HDi 240

As the Diesel fuel system ope-

! rates under high pressure: X
- All work on the fuel system is
prohibited.
- HDi engines make use of ad-
vanced technology.
All maintenance and repairs require
special qualifications which only a
CITROËN dealer can guarantee.

169
 CHECKS

CHECKING LEVELS Dipstick Brake fluid level

If a level drops significantly, have There are two marks on
the dipstick: The brake fluid level should
the corresponding system checked be close to the "MAX" mark.
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified A = max; never exceed If it is not, check the brake
workshop. this level, pad wear.
Check all of these levels regularly B = min; top up the oil
and top them up if necessary, unless level via the oil filler cap,
otherwise indicated. using the correct grade of
Take care when working under the oil for your engine. Changing the fluid
bonnet, as certain areas of the en- Refer to the servicing booklet for de-
gine may be extremely hot (risk of tails of the interval for this operation.
burns).

Oil level Fluid specification

The check is carried out either The brake fluid must conform to the
when the ignition is switched manufacturer's recommendations
on using the oil level indicator and meet the DOT4 standard.
on the instrument panel, or
using the dipstick.
This manual check will only be cor-
rect if the vehicle is on level ground
and the engine has been off for more Engine oil change
than 30 minutes. Refer to the servicing booklet for
details of the interval for this opera- Power steering or power
It is normal to top up the oil level be- steering and suspension
tween two services (or oil changes). tion.
fluid level
X CITROËN recommends that you
check the level, and top up if neces-
sary, every 3 000 miles (5 000 kms). ! In order to maintain the reli-
ability of the engine and emis- For topping up, it is necessary
After topping up the oil, the check sion control system, the use to go to a CITROËN dealer or
when switching on the ignition with of additives in the engine oil is a qualified workshop.
the oil level indicator in the instru- prohibited.
ment panel is not valid during the
30 minutes after topping up.
Oil specification
The oil must be the correct grade
for your engine and conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
170
 CHECKS

Coolant level Screenwash and headlamp Diesel additive level

wash fluid (Diesel engine with particle
emission filter)
The coolant level should be In the case of vehicles fitted
close to the "MAX" mark but with headlamp washers, the The additive reservoir
should never exceed it. low fluid level is indicated low level is indicated
by an audible signal and a by fixed illumination
When the engine is warm, the tem- message in the screen. of this warning lamp,
perature of the coolant is regulated Top up the reservoir when you next accompanied by an audible warning
by the fan. This can operate with the stop the vehicle. and a message in the multifunction
ignition off. screen.

For vehicles fitted with a particle Topping up

emissions filter, the cooling fan may Fluid specification
This additive must be topped up by
continue to run after stopping the For optimum cleaning and to avoid a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
vehicle, even if the engine is cold. freezing, this fluid must not be workshop without delay.
topped up with or replaced with plain
In addition, as the cooling system is water.
pressurised, wait at least one hour
after switching off the engine before Used products
carrying out any work.
To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew Reservoir capacity (depending on
version). Avoid prolonged contact of
the cap by two turns to allow the pres-
sure to drop. When the pressure has - screenwash fluid: approximately ! used oil or fluids with the skin.
dropped, remove the cap and top up 3.5 litres, Most of these fluids are harmful to
the level. - screenwash and headlamp wash health or indeed very corrosive.
fluid: approximately 6.15 litres.

X
Changing the coolant
The coolant does not have to be
changed. Do not discard used oil or flu-
ids into sewers or onto the
ground.
Fluid specification Take used oil to a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop (France) or
The coolant must conform to the to an authorised waste disposal
manufacturer's recommendations. site.

171
 CHECKS

CHECKS Air filter and passenger compartment filter Particle filter system (Diesel)
Unless otherwise indicated, check
these components in accordance Refer to the servicing Complementary to the catalytic con-
with the servicing booklet and ac- booklet for details of the verter, this filter makes an active
cording to your engine. replacement intervals for contribution to the preservation of air
these components. quality by trapping unburnt pollutant
Otherwise, have them checked by particles. Black exhaust fumes are
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified Depending on the environ-
ment (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and thus no longer emitted.
workshop.
the use of the vehicle (e.g. city driv- After prolonged idling or driving at very
12 V battery ing), replace them twice as often if low speeds, you may occasionally no-
The battery does not re- necessary. tice water vapour being emitted from
quire any maintenance. A clogged passenger compartment the exhaust when accelerating. This is
filter may have an adverse effect on of no consequence to the running of
However, check that the the vehicle or to the environment.
terminals are clean and the performance of the air condition-
correctly tightened, particu- ing system and generate undesirable
larly in summer and winter. odours.
When carrying out work on the bat-
tery, refer to the "Practical information"
section for details of the precautions If there is risk of blockage, a mes-
to be taken before disconnecting the sage appears in the instrument
battery and following its reconnection. Oil filter panel screen, accompanied by an
audible signal and illumination of
Replace the oil filter each the service warning lamp.
time the engine oil is This alert tells you that the par-
changed. ticle filter is approaching satura-
tion (in conditions of urban driving
of exceptionally long duration: low
Refer to the servicing booklet for de- speeds, traffic jams etc.)
tails of the replacement interval for
X The presence of this label, in particular this component. To regenerate the filter, it is advised
with the Stop & Start system, indicates to drive as soon as possible, when
the use of a specific 12 V lead-acid bat- traffic conditions permit, at a speed
tery with special technology and specifi- of 40 mph (around 60 km/h) or
cation. The involvement of a CITROËN more for at least five minutes (until
dealer or a qualified workshop is essen- the alert message disappears).
tial when replacing or disconnecting the If this alert persists, contact a CITROËN
battery. dealer or a qualified workshop.

172
 CHECKS

Manual gearbox Brake disc wear

Only use products recom-
The gearbox does not re- For information on checking
! mended by CITROËN or
quire any maintenance (no products of equivalent quality
brake disc wear, contact a and specifications.
oil change). CITROËN dealer or a quali-
fied workshop. Do not use a dry cloth with an abra-
sive product for the maintenance of
Refer to the servicing booklet for the aluminium parts; use a sponge and
details of the level checking interval soapy water.
for this component.
In order to optimise the operation
of units as important as the braking
system, CITROËN selects and of-
Automatic gearbox Parking brake fers very specific products.
To avoid damaging the electrical
If a loss of effectiveness units, the use of a high pressure
The gearbox does not re- of this system is noticed, washer in the engine compartment
quire any maintenance (no the parking brake must be is strictly prohibited.
oil change). checked, even between
two services.
Refer to the servicing booklet for de- This system must be checked by a
tails of the level checking interval for CITROËN dealer.
this component.

Brake pads
Brake wear depends on X
the style of driving, par-
ticularly in the case of ve-
hicles used in town, over
short distances. It may be
necessary to have the condition of
the brakes checked, even between
vehicle services.
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a
drop in the brake fluid level indicates
that the brake pads are worn.
173
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

TEMPORARY PUNCTURE Using the kit

REPAIR KIT
) Switch off the ignition.
Complete system consisting of a ) Affix the speed limitation sticker
compressor and a sealant cartridge to the vehicle's steering wheel
which permits the temporary repair to remind you that a wheel is in
of the tyre so that you can drive to temporary use.
the nearest garage.

) Check that the switch A is in po-

sition "0".
) Connect the pipe of the cartridge 1 to
the valve of the tyre to be repaired.

The kit is located in the boot under

the floor.
) Connect the compressor's elec-
tric plug to the vehicle's 12 V
This repair kit is available from socket.
XI CITROËN dealers or a qualified ) Start the vehicle and leave the
workshop. engine running.
It is designed to repair holes of a
maximum diameter of 6 mm, lo-
cated exclusively on the tyre tread
or shoulder. Avoid removing any
foreign bodies which have pene-
trated the tyre.
174
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

) Switch on the compressor by

If this pressure has not been
moving the switch A to posi-
tion "1" until the tyre pressure ! reached after approximately
reaches 2.0 bars. five to ten minutes, the tyre can-
not be repaired; contact a CITROËN
dealer to have your vehicle repaired.

) Remove the compressor and un-

clip and store the cartridge in a
sealed bag to avoid staining your
vehicle with traces of fluid.
) Drive immediately for approxi-
mately two miles (three kilome-
tres), at reduced speed (between
15 and 35 mph [20 and 60 km/h]),
to plug the puncture.
) Stop to check the repair and the
pressure.

) Connect the compressor pipe di-

rectly to the valve of the repaired
wheel.
XI

175
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

) Connect the compressor's elec-

Take care as sealant cartridge
tric plug to the vehicle's 12 V
socket again. ! contains ethylene-glycol. This
product is harmful if swallowed
) Start the vehicle again and leave and causes irritation to the eyes.
the engine running. Keep it out of reach of children.
The expiry date of the sealant is
indicated on the base of the car-
tridge.
The cartridge is designed for a sin-
gle use; even if only partly used, it
must be replaced.
After use, do not discard the car-
tridge into the environment, take it
) Adjust the pressure using the to a CITROËN dealer or an autho-
compressor (to inflate: switch A rised waste disposal site.
in position "1"; to deflate: Do not forget to obtain a new car-
switch A in position "0" and tridge, available from CITROËN
press button B), in accordance dealers or a qualified workshop.
with the vehicle's tyre pressure
label (located on the door aper-
ture on the left-hand side), then
remember to check that the leak
has been plugged correctly (no
further loss of pressure after
several miles [kilometres]). If the vehicle is fitted with tyre under-
) Remove the compressor, then inflation detection, the tyre under-
store the whole kit. inflation warning lamp will remain on
) Drive at reduced speed (50 mph after the wheel has been repaired
[80 km/h] max) limiting the dis- until the system is reinitialised by
tance travelled to approximately a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
120 miles (200 km). workshop.
XI
) Visit a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop as soon as
possible to have the tyre repaired
or replaced by a technician.

176
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

CHANGING A WHEEL

Access to the tools

List of tools 1. Wheelbrace

All of these tools are specific to your 2. Jack
vehicle and may vary according to 3. Tool for the removal/refitting of bolt
equipment. Do not use them for any protectors
The tools are to be found in a protec- other purpose. 4. Towing eye
tive holder inside the spare wheel.
5. Moveable chock
) Pull back the retaining strap for
access.

XI

177
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Access to the spare wheel

To remove the spare wheel To reposition the spare wheel

The tyre pressures are indi-
) Saloon: raise the boot floor and
fold in two.
) Position the spare wheel flat in
the boot, then pull it towards you.
! cated on the label located on
the driver's side centre door
) Tourer: raise the boot floor and ) Next place the toolbox inside the pillar. Tyre pressures are given
hook it using the retractable wheel, then secure the assembly for different vehicle loading condi-
handle. Secure the hook to the with the strap. tions.
top part of the boot. ) Release the boot floor to return it
) Detach the strap then push the to its initial position.
wheel forwards so as to be able
to lift it.

XI

178
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Removing a wheel ) Continue to extend the jack until

the wheel is a few centimetres
off the ground.
) Undo the bolts, remove the wheel.

Before positioning the jack:

) Park the vehicle on stable, firm
ground that is not slippery. apply
!
the parking brake. ) Always adjust the vehicle’s
ground clearance to the "maxi-
) If your vehicle is equipped with mum height" position and re-
"Hydractive III+" suspension, ) Position the jack at one of the four
jacking-points provided on the un- tain this adjustment for as long
with the engine running at idle, as the jack is under the vehicle
adjust the ground clearance to derbody close to the wheels, then
use the wheelbrace to unwind the (do not use the hydraulic ad-
its maximum height. justments),
) Switch off the ignition and en- jack until it reaches the ground.
) Immobilise your vehicle on hor-
gage first gear or reverse gear izontal, stable and non-slippery
depending on any slope (for a ground,
vehicle with automatic gearbox,
select position P). ) Ensure that any passengers
have left the vehicle and are in
) If your vehicle is fitted with a safe place.
"Hydractive III+" suspension,
position the chock, whichever di- Never get underneath the vehicle if
rection the gradient may be in, in it is supported only by the jack.
front of the front wheel diametri- The jack and all of the tools are
cally opposite to the one to be specific to your vehicle. Do not use
replaced. them for any other applications.
Have the original wheel repaired
and refitted as soon as possible. XI

) Remove the protector from each

bolt using tool 3.
) Slacken the wheel bolts.
179
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Wheel for temporary use Fitting a wheel

If your vehicle is fitted with a
) Fit the wheel on the hub, using ! spare wheel of a different size
the centring guide. Make sure to those on the vehicle, you
that the contact surface between must not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
the hub and the wheel is clean. whilst using the spare wheel.
) Screw in the bolts but do not fully The wheel bolts are specific to the
tighten them. type of wheel.
) Lower the jack and remove it. If the type of wheel is changed,
check with your CITROËN dealer
) Tighten the wheel bolts, using or a qualified workshop that the
the wheelbrace. wheel bolts are compatible with the
) Refit the protectors on the bolts. new wheels.
Your vehicle may be fitted with a ) Return the ground clearance to Take care to note down the code
spare wheel which is different to the normal position. number engraved on the head of
those on the vehicle. When fitting ) Ensure the tyre pressure is correct the security bolt socket. This will
the spare wheel, it is normal to no- and have the balancing checked. enable you to obtain a replace-
tice that the wheel bolt washers do ment security bolt socket from your
not come into contact with the wheel dealer.
rim. The spare wheel is secured by
the conical tapering of the wheel
bolt’s shaft. Under-inflation detection
When refitting the original wheel, These wheels have tyre pressure
ensure that the wheel bolt contact sensors. Repairs must be carried
surfaces are clean and in good con- out by a CITROËN dealer or a quali-
dition. fied workshop.

Security bolts (according to

version)
Each wheel is equipped with one se-
XI curity bolt.
To remove it:
) Remove the protector using tool 3.
) Use the security socket with the
wheelbrace.

180
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

CHANGING A BULB Front lamps

Model with Xenon headlamps (D1S)

The headlamps are fitted with

! polycarbonate glass with a
Risk of electrocution
Xenon bulbs must be replaced by
protective coating: a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
) do not clean them using a dry workshop.
or abrasive cloth, nor with a You are advised to change both
detergent or solvent product, D1S bulbs at the same time, if one
) use a sponge and soapy water, of them has failed.
) when using a high pressure
washer on persistent marks, do
not keep the lance directed to-
wards the lamps or their edges
for too long, so as not to dam-
age their protective coating and
seals, 1. Dual-function Xenon
) do not touch the bulb directly headlamps (dipped/main): D1S
with your fingers, use lint-free 2. Cornering lighting: HP19
cloths.
3. Daytime running lamps /
sidelamps (LEDs)

For the maintenance of the front lamps

Changing a bulb should only be and changing HP19 and D1S bulbs
done after the headlamp has been and LED lamps, contact a CITROËN
switched off for a few minutes (risk dealer or a qualified workshop.
of serious burns).
It is imperative to use only anti- XI
ultraviolet (UV) type bulbs in order
not to damage the headlamp.
Always replace a failed bulb with a
new bulb with the same type and
specification.

181
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Model with halogen headlamps Main beam headlamps

1. Main beams: H1 ) Remove the protective cap A.

2. Dipped beams: H7 ) Disengage the retaining spring.
3. Directional lighting: H7 ) Remove the bulb and replace it,
4. Daytime running lamps / paying attention to the direction
sidelamps (LEDs) of fitting.
) Refit the retaining spring.
For the maintenance of the front lamps ) Refit the protective cap A.
and changing LED lamps, contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified work-
shop.

XI

182
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Dipped beam Directional lamp

headlamps

) Remove the protective cap B. ) Remove the protective cap C.

) Disconnect the connector by ) Disconnect the connector by
pressing it between the thumb pressing it between the thumb
and index finger. and index finger.
) Free the bulb from its two metal ) Free the bulb from its two metal
clamps. clamps.
) Take out the bulb. ) Take out the bulb.
) Replace the bulb, exerting a slight ) Replace the bulb, exerting a
axial force. slight axial force.
) Refit the connector, until it is all ) Refit the connector, until it is all
the way in. the way in.
) Refit the protective cap B. ) Refit the protective cap C.

XI

183
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Direction indicators Front foglamps

) Remove the fixing screw of ) Remove the fixing screw of

cover A using a torx tool, tip the cover A using a torx tool, tip the
cover over and remove. cover over and remove. ) Remove the bulb by performing
) Remove the fixing screw of ) Remove the fixing screw of a quarter of a turn.
lamp B using a torx tool and pull lamp B using a torx tool and pull ) Replace the bulb.
the headlamp unit to remove it the headlamp unit to remove it ) Refit the connector D.
from the bumper. from the bumper.
) Refit the headlamp unit in the
) Detach the bulb C by pressing ) Disconnect the connector D. bumper.
on bars 1 and 2.
) Refit the lamp screws.
) Disconnect the connector (pull
whilst pressing on the grey ) Position the cover using its
tongue using a flat screwdriver). guides and refit the screws.
) Replace the bulb. Bulbs: H8
) Refit the connector (push the
grey tongue in well).
) Refit the headlamp unit in the
bumper.
XI ) Refit the lamp screws.
) Position the cover using its
guides and refit the screws.
Bulbs: HP24W

184
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Side repeaters Rear lamps (Saloon) Boot-mounted lamps

) Open the boot.

The side repeater is sealed. ) Using a flat screwdriver, remove
Identify the failed bulb. the 3 clips which fix the trim in
If the bulb is faulty, replace the side 1. Brake lamps and sidelamps: the lamp area.
repeater. P 21 W / 5 W ) Partially remove the trim F.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a 2. Sidelamps: R 5 W
qualified workshop. ) Disconnect the connector G.
3. Reversing lamps: H 21 W
4. Foglamps: H 21 W
5. Direction indicators:
PY 21 W
When refitting, take care not to
trap the electrical cables.

) Unclip the bulb holder H.

XI
) Replace the bulb.
) Refit the bulb holder H.
) Check that the bulb holder H is se-
cured correctly by the two clips 6.
) Refit the connector G.
) Replace and fix the trim F with its
clips.
185
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Wing-mounted lamps

) Detach the bulb holder D.

) Replace the bulb.
) Refit the bulb holder D.
) Place the lamp in its housing.
) Screw in the 2 fixings C.
) Refit connector B.
) Refit the trim A.
You can use the wheelbrace to
screw or unscrew the fixings C.

) Remove the lateral boot trim ) Disconnect connector B.

flap A. To do so, pull it towards ) Unscrew the 2 fixings C.
the inside of the boot, then pull it
upwards. ) Remove the lamp from its housing.
XI

186
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Rear lamps (Tourer) Boot-mounted lamps

Identify the failed bulb. ) Open the boot. ) Unclip the bulb holder J.
1. Brake lamps and sidelamps: ) Using a flat screwdriver, remove ) Replace the bulb.
P 21 W / 5 W the plastic cover F. ) Refit the bulb holder J ensur-
2. Sidelamps: R 5 W ) Disconnect the connector G. ing that it is correctly clipped in
3. Reversing lamps: H 21 W ) Unscrew the fixing nut H. place.
4. Foglamps: H 21 W ) Disengage the lamp from its ) Position the lamp in its housing.
5. Direction indicators: housing. ) Tighten the fixing nut H.
PY 21 W ) Refit the connector G.
) Position and clip in place the
plastic cover F.
You can use the wheelbrace to screw
or unscrew the fixing nut H.

XI

187
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Wing-mounted lamps

) Detach the bulb holder D.

) Replace the faulty bulb.
) Refit the bulb holder D.
) Place the lamp in its housing.
) Screw in the fixing nut C.
) Refit the connector B.
) Refit the trim A.
You can use the wheelbrace to screw
or unscrew the fixing nut C.

Remove the lateral boot trim A. ) Disconnect the connector B.

To do so: ) Unscrew the fixing nut C.
) Pull it towards towards the inside ) Remove the lamp from its housing.
XI of the boot.
) Pull it upwards.

188
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Number plate lamps (W5W) Third brake lamp (LEDs)

) Remove the lens. For the replacement of this type

) Change the faulty bulb. of LED lamp, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.

) Insert a thin screwdriver into one XI

of the external holes of the lens.
) Push it outwards to unclip it.

189
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Interior lamps Boot lamp Floor lighting

Roof lamps ) Detach the cover and use a W 5W ) Detach the cover and use a W 5W
) Unclip the transparent cover of bulb. bulb.
the roof lamp to reach the bulb.
Bulb: W 5 W
Map reading lamp
) Detach the cover. Pavement lighting Glove box
) If necessary, detach the partition
of the affected map reading lamp.

Rear reading lamps (Tourer)

XI
) Detach the cover and use a W 5W ) Detach the cover and use a W 5W
bulb. bulb.

) Detach the cover of the reading

lamp to access the bulb.
Bulb: W 5 W
190
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

CHANGING A FUSE Fuses under the dashboard

Procedure for replacing a faulty fuse Access to the fuses

with a new fuse to rectify a failure of ) open the glove box then unclip
the corresponding function. the access cover.
The 2 fuseboxes are located below
the dashboard and under the bonnet.

Replacing a fuse
Before replacing a fuse, you should
ascertain the cause of the fault and Fusebox A
have it remedied. the numbers of the
fuses are indicated on the fusebox.
Replace the fuse that has blown
with one of the same rating (same
colour).
Use the special tweezer 1 placed on
the flap close to the fuseboxes.

Good Failed
Tweezer 1

XI

Tweezer 1

Fusebox C Fusebox B
191
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Table of fuses

Fuse N° Rating Function

G29 - Not used
G30 5A Heated door mirrors
G31 5A Rain and sunshine sensor
G32 5A Seat belt not fastened warning lamps
G33 5A Electrochromatic rear view mirror
G34 20 A Sunroof (saloon)
G35 5A Passenger door lighting - passenger door mirror adjustment
G36 30 A Electric tailgate (tourer)
G37 20 A Heated front seats
G38 30 A Driver’s electric seat
G39 30 A Passenger’s electric seat - HIFI amplifier
G40 3A Trailer relay unit supply

FUSEBOX B

Fuse N° Rating Function

15 A 6 speed automatic gearbox
XI G36
5A 4 speed automatic gearbox
G37 10 A Daytime running lamps - Diagnostic socket
G38 3A ESP
G39 10 A Hydraulic suspension
G40 3A STOP switch
192
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

FUSEBOX C

Fuse N° Rating Function

F1 15 A Rear screen wipe (Tourer)
F2 30 A Locking and deadlocking relay
F3 5A Airbags

F4 10 A Automatic gearbox - additional heater unit (Diesel) - electrochrome rear view mirror

F5 30 A Front window - sunroof - passenger door lighting - passenger door mirror adjustment

F6 30 A Rear window

F7 5A Vanity mirror lighting - Glove box lighting - interior lamps - torch (tourer)

Radio - CD changer - Steering mounted controls - Screen - Under-inflation detection -

F8 20 A Electric boot ECU
F9 30 A Cigar lighter - front 12 V socket
F10 15 A Alarm - Steering mounted controls, signalling and wiper controls
F11 15 A Low current ignition switch
Driver’s electric seat - instrument panel - seat belt not fastened warning lamps - air
F12 15 A conditioning controls

F13 5A Engine relay unit - Hydraulic suspension pump cut-off relay - airbag ECU supply

Rain and sunshine sensor - parking sensors - passenger’s electric seat - trailer relay unit - XI
F14 15 A HIFI amplifier ECU - Bluetooth system - Lane Departure Warning System

F15 30 A Locking and deadlocking relay

F17 40 A Heated rear screen - heated door mirrors
FSH SHUNT PARK SHUNT
193
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Fuses under the bonnet Table of fuses

Fuse N° Rating Function

F1 20 A Engine control unit
F2 15 A Horn
F3 10 A Screen wash pump
F4 10 A Headlamp wash pump
F5 15 A Starter
Airflow sensor - Directional headlamps -
F6 10 A Diagnostic socket
F7 10 A Automatic gear lever lock - Power steering

Access to the fuses F8 25 A Starter motor

) Undo each screw by a 1/4 turn. F9 10 A Clutch switch - Stop switch
) Replace the fuse.
F10 30 A Actuator motors
F11 40 A Air conditioning blower
F12 30 A Wipers

F13 40 A BSI supply (ignition on)

F14 30 A -
F15 10 A Right-hand main beam
F16 10 A Left-hand main beam
XI
After a repair, carefully refit the F17 15 A Right-hand dipped beam
cover.
F18 15 A Left-hand dipped beam
Any repairs on the MAXI fuses
(that give additional protection), F19 15 A Actuator motors
located in the fuseboxes, must
be left to a CITROËN dealer or a F20 10 A Actuator motors
qualified workshop. F21 5A Actuator motors
194
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Table of fuses

Fuse N° Rating Function

F6 25 A Rear 12 V socket (max power: 100 W)
F7 15 A Foglamps
F8 20 A Additional burner (Diesel)
F9 30 A Electric parking brake

Your vehicle’s electrical sys-

! tem is designed to operate
with either standard or op-
tional equipment.
Before installing electrical equip-
ment or accessories on your vehi-
cle, consult a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
CITROËN declines all responsibil-
ity for the consequences and costs
that are caused by faults or repairs
on your vehicle resulting from the
installation of accessories that
are not supplied and/or not rec-
ommended by CITROËN and not
installed in conformity with its re-
quirements, particularly when the
total consumption of additional de-
After a repair, carefully refit the vices exceeds 10 milliamperes.
cover. The Maxi fuses give additional pro- XI
If the cover is not correctly po- tection to electrical systems. Any
sitioned or not properly closed, work on them must be carried out
this could cause serious prob- by a CITROËN dealer or a quali-
lems on your vehicle. For the fied workshop.
same reason, take care not to
spill any liquid in the fusebox.

195
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

BATTERY Access to the battery V6 HDi engine

Procedure for charging your battery
when it is flat or for starting the en-
gine using another battery.

The battery is located under the bonnet.

The presence of this label, in The battery is located in the boot
! particular with the Stop & Start
For access to it:
) open the bonnet using the interi-
under the left-hand wing trim.
system, indicates the use of a For access to it:
12 V lead-acid battery with special or release lever, then the exterior
safety catch, ) open the boot,
technology and specification; the
involvement of a CITROËN dealer ) secure the bonnet stay, ) open the flap and remove the
or a qualified workshop is essential battery.
) remove the plastic cover to gain
when replacing or disconnecting access to the two terminals,
the battery. ) unclip the fusebox to remove the
Failure to observe this recommen- battery, if necessary.
dation may cause premature wear
of the battery.

After refitting the battery by a

XI CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop, the Stop & Start system
will only be active after a continu-
ous period of immobilisation of the
vehicle, a period which depends
on the climatic conditions and the
state of charge of the battery (up to
about 8 hours).

196
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Starting using another Charging the battery using a Do not disconnect the terminals
battery battery charger ! while the engine is running.
Do not charge the batteries without
disconnecting the terminals first.
Do not disconnect the battery to Do not touch the clips during the
charge it. operation.
Do not lean over the batteries.
) Disconnect the battery from the Disconnect the cables in the re-
vehicle. verse order to connection, ensur-
ing that they do not touch.
) Follow the instructions for use
provided by the manufacturer of
the charger. Before disconnecting the battery
) Reconnect starting with the neg- Wait 2 minutes after switching off
) Lift the pins to remove the front ative terminal (-). the ignition before disconnecting
left headlamp cover (V6 HDi en- ) Check that the terminals and the battery.
gine). connectors are clean. If they are Close the windows and the doors
) Connect the red cable to the covered with sulphate (whitish or before disconnecting the battery.
positive terminal (+) of the flat greenish deposit), remove them
battery A, then to the positive ter- and clean them.
minal (+) of the slave battery B.
) Connect one end of the green or The batteries contain harmful Following reconnection of the
black cable to the negative ter- substances such as sulphuric battery
minal (-) of the slave battery B. acid and lead. They must be Following reconnection of the bat-
V6 HDi engine: the positive ter- disposed of in accordance with tery, switch on the ignition and wait
minal (-) is located under the red regulations and must not, in any 1 minute before starting to permit
cover. circumstances, be discarded with initialisation of the electronic sys-
) Connect the other end of the green household waste. tems. However, if slight malfunctions
or black cable to the earth point C Take used remote control batteries remain following this operation, con-
on the broken down vehicle. and vehicle batteries to an autho- tact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
) Operate the starter, let the en- rised collection point. workshop. XI
gine run. Referring to the corresponding sec-
tion, you must yourself reinitialise:
) Wait until the engine returns to
idle and disconnect the cables. - the remote control key,
It is advisable to disconnect the - the glass panoramic roof blind,
battery if the vehicle is to be left un- - the GPS satellite navigation system.
used for more than one month.

197
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

ENERGY ECONOMY Exiting economy mode TOWING THE VEHICLE

MODE
These functions are reactivated auto- Procedure for having your vehicle
System which manages the duration matically next time the vehicle is driven. towed or for towing another vehicle
of use of certain functions to con- ) In order to resume the use of using a removable towing eye.
serve a sufficient level of charge in these functions immediately, start
the battery. the engine and let it run for a few
After the engine has stopped, you can minutes.
still use functions such as the audio The time available will then be dou-
and telematics system, windscreen ble the duration for which the en- Access to the tools
wipers, dipped headlamps, courtesy gine was left running. However, this
lights, etc. for a maximum combined time will always be between five and
duration of thirty minutes. thirty minutes.
This period may be significantly re-
duced if the battery charge is low.

A flat battery prevents the en-

! gine from starting (refer to the
Switching to economy mode corresponding section).

Once the thirty minutes are over, a

message appears on the multi-function
screen indicating that the vehicle has
switched to economy mode and the
active functions are put on standby.
If the telephone is being used at this
time:
The towing eye is installed in the
- it will be maintained for five min- jack box placed in the spare wheel.
utes with hands-free kit of your
Audio system, For access to it:
- it will be maintained for ten minutes ) open the boot,
XI with your eMyWay. ) raise the floor,
) remove the towing eye from the
jack box.

198
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Towing your vehicle Towing another

vehicle
Failure to observe this special con-
dition could result in damage to
certain braking components and
the absence of braking assistance
the next time the engine is started.
In the event of a fault or malfunc-
tion with the electronic gearbox
system, the vehicle may be immo-
bilised with a gear engaged. In this
case the front of the vehicle must
be lifted for towing.

) On the front bumper, unclip the ) On the rear bumper, unclip the cover
cover by pressing at the top. by pressing:
) Screw the towing eye in fully. - on the right (Saloon),
) Attach the towing bar. - at the bottom (Tourer).
) Switch on the hazard warning ) Screw the towing eye in fully.
lamps on the towed vehicle. ) Attach the towing bar.
) Place the gear lever in neutral ) Switch on the hazard warning
(position N on the automatic lamps on the towed vehicle.
gearbox).

When towing with all four wheels

on the ground, always use a tow-
ing bar. XI
When towing with only two wheels
on the ground, always use profes-
sional lifting equipment.
When towing with the engine off,
there is no longer any braking or
steering assistance.

199
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

TOWING A TRAILER Driving advice The maximum towed load on a long

incline depends on the gradient and
Distribution of loads the ambient temperature.
Towbar suitable for the attachment ) Distribute the load in the trailer In all cases, keep a check on the
of a trailer or installation of a bicycle so that the heaviest items are as coolant temperature.
carrier, with additional lighting and close as possible to the axle and
signalling. the nose weight approaches the
maximum permitted without ex-
ceeding it. ) If the warning lamp and
Air density decreases with altitude, the STOP warning lamp
thus reducing engine performance. come on, stop the vehicle
Above 1 000 metres, the maximum and switch off the engine
towed load must be reduced by 10 % as soon as possible.
for every 1 000 metres of altitude.
Braking
Refer to the "Technical Data" section Towing a trailer increases the brak-
Your vehicle is primarily designed for details of the weights and towed ing distance.
for transporting people and luggage, loads which apply to your vehicle. To avoid overheating of the brakes
but it may also be used for towing a on a long mountain type of descent,
trailer. the use of engine braking is recom-
mended.
Side wind
We recommend the use of genuine
CITROËN towbars and their har- ) Take into account the increased Tyres
nesses that have been tested and sensitivity to side wind. ) Check the tyre pressures of the
approved from the design stage of towing vehicle and of the trailer,
your vehicle, and that the fitting of the observing the recommended
towbar is entrusted to a CITROËN Cooling pressures.
dealer or a qualified workshop. Towing a trailer on a slope increases
the temperature of the coolant. Lighting
If the towbar is not fitted by a
XI ! CITROËN dealer, it is imperative
As the fan is electrically controlled,
its cooling capacity is not dependent
) Check the electrical lighting and
signalling on the trailer.
that it is fitted in accordance with on the engine speed.
the vehicle manufacturer's instructions. ) To lower the engine speed, re-
Driving with a trailer places great- duce your speed.
er demands on the towing vehicle The rear parking sensors will be
and the driver must take particular deactivated automatically if a gen-
care. uine CITROËN towbar is used.

200
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Blanking cover ROOF BARS

Maximum load that can be
The design of your vehicle requires ! distributed on the roof bars
the use of roof bars that are tested (for a loading height not ex-
and approved by CITROËN, for your ceeding 40 cm; except bicycle car-
safety and to avoid damage to the rier): 80 kg.
roof and tailgate. If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt
Regardless of the type of loading your speed to the profile of the road
equipment to be transported on the to avoid damaging the roof bars
roof (bicycle carrier, ski carrier...), it and the fixings on the roof.
is imperative that you add transverse Please refer to national legislation
roof bars. Any securing or lashing to in order to comply with the regula-
components other than the roof bars tions concerning the transportation
is strictly prohibited. of objects which are longer than
the vehicle.

When towing, you must remove the

blanking cover in the front bumper
as well as the bonnet seal if fitted.
Recommendations
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop for this. ) Distribute your load evenly, avoid-
ing overloading on one side.
) Arrange the heaviest part of the
load as close as possible to the
roof.
) Anchor the load securely and
draw attention to it if any part of
it is overhanging.
) Drive gently, as the vehicle will
be more liable to the effects of
side winds (vehicle stability may XI
be altered).
) Remove the roof bars as soon
as they are no longer needed.

201
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

VERY COLD PROTECTION*

Adjustable device which prevents
the intake of snow particles, which
could obstruct the air filter.

HDi Diesel 160 PEF engine V6 HDi Diesel 240 PEF

engine
Normal position Snow position Snow position
The flap 2 is in a horizontal position ) Push and rotate the knob 1 by Slide the deflector 1 into the air
in the air duct 3. 90 ° in the direction of the arrow duct 2 and clip in.
in order to position the flap 2 in a
vertical position in the air duct 3.
To return to the normal position,
push the knob 1 then rotate in the
XI opposite direction.
It is essential to remove the very
cold protection:
- When the ambient temperature
exceeds 10 °C.
- When driving at speeds of over
75 mph (approximately 120 km/h).
* According to country.
202
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

COLD CLIMATE SCREEN*

Removeable screen which prevents
the accumulation of snow at the ra-
diator cooling fan.

Fitting
) Offer up the 2 sections of the snow
guard to the upper and lower sec-
tions of the front bumper. Before fitting After fitting
) Press on the surround to clip in
one by one the fixing clips.

Remove
) Using a screwdriver, lift it up to de-
tach each fixing clip one by one.

It is essential to remove the snow

guard:
- When the ambient temperature
exceeds 10 °C,
- When towing,
- When driving at speeds of over XI
75 mph (approximately 120 km/h).

* According to country.
203
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Matt paint
If you vehicle is finished with a clear
Never clean the vehicle without water.
matt lacquer, please observe the fol-
lowing recommendations to avoid ! Never wash your vehicle in an automatic roller brush car wash.
damaging the paintwork by the use Never polish the vehicle body, nor the alloy wheels. Doing this will make the
of an inappropriate cleaning proce- paintwork shiny.
dures.
Do not use paint cleaners, abrasive products or paint polishing or preserving
These recommendations are also products (such as wax, for example) on the paintwork. These products are
valid for alloy road wheels finished only suitable for bright finishes. Application of these products on vehicles with
with clear matt lacquer. a matt finish will seriously damage the paint surface of the vehicle, giving rise
to irreversible shiny or stained areas.
Never use a high pressure jet wash with a lance fitted with a brush, this may
scratch the paintwork.
Never select a wash programme that finishes with a hot wax cycle.

We recommend the use of a high pressure jet wash, or at least a water hose
with a high output.
We recommend that the vehicle be rinsed using de-ionised water.
Use only a microfibre cloth to dry the vehicle. It must be clean and used
without heavy pressure.
Lightly wipe off any fuel stains present on the bodywork using a soft cloth,
then leave to dry.

From the range of cleaning and maintenance products in the "TECHNATURE"

XI range recommended and approved by CITROËN, use only the insect remover
and car shampoo, which are the only products to be used on the bodywork.
The insect remover can also be used to remove minor marks (for example:
finger marks...).
Always have paint repairs done by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

204
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

ACCESSORIES "Comfort": "Security and safety":

front and rear parking sensors, isotherm anti-intrusion alarm, warning triangle
A wide range of accessories and module, reading lamp, sun blinds, headrest- and high visibility vest, breathalyzer,
genuine parts is available from the mounted coat hanger... first aid kit, snow chains, non-skid
CITROËN dealer network. covers, security wheel bolts, vehicle
These accessories and parts have tracking system, child seats, fire ex-
been tested and approved for reli- tinguisher, caravan mirror, pet cage
ability and safety. and seat belt, dog guard...
They are all adapted to your vehicle "Transport solutions":
and benefit from CITROËN's recom- boot liner, boot carpet, towbars, tow-
mendation and warranty. bar wiring harness, transverse roof
bars, bicycle carrier, ski carrier, roof
boxes, boot dividers, boot net, boot
organiser, sliding boot tray, platform
on towbar, ...
"Protection":
mats*, seat covers, mud flaps, bum-
per protectors, vehicle covers, door
and boot sill protectors...
"Style":
alloy wheels, rear spoiler, chromed
mirror shells, door sill protectors, gear
lever knobs...

XI
* To avoid any risk of jamming of
the pedals:
- ensure that the mat is posi-
tioned and secured correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of an-
other.
205
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

"Multimedia":
Wi-Fi on board, 230V socket, audio
systems, speakers, semi-integral
navigation systems, portable navi-
gation systems, hands-free kit, DVD
player, USB Box, mapping update
CD, driving aid, Hi-Fi module...

Installation of radio Depending on the legislation in

communication transmitters force in the country, it may be com-
Before installing any after-market ra- pulsory to have a high visibility
dio communication transmitter, you safety vest, warning triangle and
can contact a CITROËN dealer for spare bulbs and fuses available in
the specification of transmitters which the vehicle.
can be fitted (frequency, maximum
power, aerial position, specific instal-
lation requirements), in line with the
Vehicle Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive (2004/104/EC).
The fitting of electrical equip-
! ment or accessories which
are not recommended by
CITROËN may result in a failure of
your vehicle's electronic system and
excessive electrical consumption.
Please note this precaution. You
XI are advised to contact a CITROËN
representative to be shown the
range of recommended equipment
and accessories.

206
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

Engines and gearboxes

Model codes: 5FS-8/P 5FV-5FN/A 5FV-5FN/8 RFJF
RD... RW...

PETROL ENGINES 1.6 litre VTi 120 1.6 litre THP 155 2 litre 16V

Cubic capacity (cc) 1 598 1 598 1 997

Bore x stroke (mm) 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8 85 x 88

EU standard maximum power (kW) / 88 / 120 115* / 159 103 / 143
hp DIN
Maximum power engine speed (rpm) 6 000 6 000 6 000

EU standard maximum torque (Nm) 160 240 200

Maximum torque engine speed (rpm) 4 250 1 400 4 000

Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded

Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes

Electronic gearbox system Automatic Manual Automatic

GEARBOXES
(6-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed) (4-speed)

OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)

Engine (with filter replacement) 4.25 4.25 4.25 5

XII
* In Russia, the maximum power is 110 kW and in Brazil, the maximum power is 120 kW.

207
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

Weights and towed loads (Saloon) in kg

Petrol engines 1.6 litre VTi 120 1.6 litre THP 155 2 litre 16V

Gearboxes Electronic gearbox system Automatic Manual Automatic

Model codes: 5FS-8/P 5FV-5FN/A 5FV-5FN/8 RFJF

RD...
- Unladen weight 1 425 1 515 1 471 1 583
- Kerb weight 1 500 1 590 1 546 1 658

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 018 2 026 2 065 2 090

- Gross train weight (GTW) 3 318 3 526 3 565 3 590

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 300 1 500 1 500 1 500

- Braked trailer* (with load transfer 1 570 1 710 1 730 1 720

within GTW limit)

- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 64 69 70 69

* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle
is reduced by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its
road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
XII must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your
country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
208
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

Weights and towed loads (Tourer) in kg

Petrol engines 1.6 litre VTi 120 1.6 litre THP 155 2 litre 16V

Gearboxes Electronic gearbox system Automatic Manual Automatic

Model codes: 5FS-8/P 5FV-5FN/A 5FV-5FN/8 RFJF

RW...
- Unladen weight 1 498 1 534 1 503 1 619
- Kerb weight 1 573 1 609 1 578 1 694

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 133 2 200 2 167 2 224

- Gross train weight (GTW) 3 433 3 700 3 667 3 724

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 300 1 500 1 500 1 500

- Braked trailer* (with load transfer 1 600 1 790 1 790 1 800

within GTW limit)

- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 65 74 73 72

* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle
is reduced by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its
road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. XII
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your
country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
209
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

Engines and gearboxes

Model codes: 9HL/8 9HR/8 RHR-RHF/H-8
RD... RW...

DIESEL ENGINES HDi 115 e-HDi 115 HDi 140

Cubic capacity (cc) 1 560 1 560 1 997

Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3 75 x 88.3 85 x 88

EU standard maximum power (kW) / 84 / 115 84 / 115 103* / 140
hp DIN
Maximum power engine speed (rpm) 3 600 3 600 4 000

EU standard maximum torque (Nm) 240 270 320

Maximum torque engine speed (rpm) 1 500 1 750 2 000

Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel

Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes

Particle emission filter (PEF) Yes Yes Yes

Manual Electronic gearbox system Manual

GEARBOXES
(5-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed)

OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)

Engine (with filter replacement) 3.75 5.25

XII
* In Belgium, the maximum power is 100 kW.

210
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

Engines and gearboxes

Model codes: RHH-RHE-RHD/8 RHH-RHE-RHD/A 4HL/A X8Z/A
RD... RW...

DIESEL ENGINES HDi 160 HDi 200 V6 HDi 240

Cubic capacity (cc) 1 997 2 179 2 993

Bore x stroke (mm) 85 x 88 85 x 96 84 x 90

EU standard maximum power (kW) / 120* / 163 150 / 206 177 / 240
hp DIN
Maximum power engine speed (rpm) 3 750 3 500 3 800

EU standard maximum torque (Nm) 340 450 450

Maximum torque engine speed (rpm) 2 000 2 000 1 600

Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel

Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes

Particle emissions filter (PEF) Yes Yes Yes

Manual Automatic Automatic Automatic

GEARBOXES
(6-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed)

OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)

Engine (with filter replacement) 5.5 5.25 6.25

XII
* In Russia, the maximum power is 100 kW.

211
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

Weights and towed loads (Saloon) in kg

Diesel engines HDi 115 e-HDi 115 HDi 140

Gearboxes Manual Electronic gearbox system Manual

Model codes: 9HL/8 9HR/8 RHR-RHF/H-8

RD...
- Unladen weight 1 506 1 525 1 535
- Kerb weight 1 581 1 600 1 683

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 041 2 062 2 155

- Gross train weight (GTW) 3 141 3 162 3 755

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 100 1 100 1 600

- Braked trailer* (with load transfer 1 340 1 340 1 840

within GTW limit)

- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 55 55 73
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle
is reduced by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its
road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
XII must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx.) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
212
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

Weights and towed loads (Saloon) in kg

Diesel engines HDi 160 HDi 200 V6 HDi 240

Gearboxes Manual Automatic Automatic Automatic

Model codes: RHH-RHE-RHD/8 RHH-RHE-RHD/A 4HL/A X8Z/A

RD...
- Unladen weight 1 563 1 609 1 660 1 766
- Kerb weight 1 638 1 684 1 806 1 841

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 156 2 190 2 231 2 276

- Gross train weight (GTW) 3 656 3 290 3 831 3 676

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 500 1 100 1 600 1 400

- Braked trailer* (with load transfer

1 740 1 390 1 850 1 650
within GTW limit)

- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 70 57 73 67
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle
is reduced by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its
road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. XII
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx.) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
213
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

Weights and towed loads (Tourer) in kg

Diesel engines HDi 115 e-HDi 115 HDi 140

Gearboxes Manual Electronic gearbox system Manual

Model codes: 9HL/8 9HR/8 RHR-RHF/H-8

RW...
- Unladen weight 1 538 1 540 1 655
- Kerb weight 1 613 1 615 1 730

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 153 2 174 2 276

- Gross train weight (GTW) 3 153 3 174 3 776

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 000 1 000 1 500

- Braked trailer* (with load transfer 1 300 1 300 1 800

within GTW limit)

- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 53 54 72

* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle
is reduced by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its
road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
XII must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your
country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
214
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

Weights and towed loads (Tourer) in kg

Diesel engines HDi 160 HDi 200 V6 HDi 240

Gearboxes Manual Automatic Automatic Automatic

Model codes: RHH-RHE-RHD/8 RHH-RHE-RHD/A 4HL/A X8Z/A

RW...
- Unladed weight 1 595 1 642 1 767 1 763
- Kerb weight 1 670 1 717 1 842 1 838

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 238 2 286 2 367 2 347

- Gross train weight (GTW) 3 638 3 286 3 967 3 647

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 400 1 000 1 600 1 300

- Braked trailer* (with load transfer 1 670 1 290 1 890 1 570

within GTW limit)

- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 67 53 76 63

* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle
is reduced by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its
road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. XII
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your
country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
215
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

Weights and towed loads (Tourer commercial versions) in kg

Diesel engines HDi 115 HDi 140

Gearboxes Manual Manual

Model codes: 9HL0/U RHF8/U

RW...
- Unladen weight 1 486 1 585
- Kerb weight* 1 561 1 660

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)** 2 155 2 247

- Gross train weight (GTW)*** 3 155 3 747

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient**** 1 000 1 500

- Braked trailer (with load transfer within GTW limit) X X

- Unbraked trailer 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 53 72

* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + the driver (75 kg).
** Exceeding the maximum weight on the rear axle when towing involves restricting the maximum speed to 80 km/h
(approximately 50 mph) as defined by point 2.7 of the EU Directive.
*** Exceeding the gross vehicle weight when towing involves restricting the maximum speed to 80 km/h (approximately
50 mph) as defined by point 2.7 of the EU Directive.
**** Maximum braked trailer weight within the GTW limit; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have
XII an adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
216
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

DIMENSIONS (IN MM)

Exterior (Saloon)

A 2 815

B 1 054

C 910

D 4 779

E 1 586

F 2 096

G 1 557

H 1 860

I* 1 451

* Without roof bars.

XII

217
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

Interior (Saloon)

A 1 030

B 1 115

C 566

D 504

E 1 040

F 1 705

XII

218
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

Exterior (Tourer)

A 2 815

B 1 054

C 959

D 4 829

E 1 586

F 2 096

G 1 557

H 1 860

I* 1 479

* Without roof bars.

XII

219
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

Interior (Tourer)

A 1 060

B 1 115

C 510

D 851

E 1 058

F 1 723

XII

220
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

IDENTIFICATION
MARKINGS
Various visible markings for identifi- A. VIN plate B. VIN stamped on body
cation of the vehicle. On the left hand centre door pillar.
The vehicle identification number 1. EU type approval number.
(VIN) is also indicated on the regis-
tration document. 2. Vehicle Identification Number C. VIN on dashboard
(VIN).
All genuine CITROËN replacement
parts are available exclusively within 3. Gross vehicle weight.
the dealer network. 4. Gross train weight. D. Paint colour code and tyre
For your safety and in order to re- 5. Maximum weight on front axle. reference
main within the terms of the war- 6. Maximum weight on rear axle. Tyre pressures
ranty, you are advised to use only On the driver's side centre pillar.
CITROËN replacement parts.

Observe the tyre pressures indi-

cated by CITROËN.
Check the tyre pressures regularly,
when cold.
Never deflate a warm tyre.
When changing tyres, it is essen- XII
tial to use the sizes recommended
for your vehicle.

221
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

XII

222
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL
223
 EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL
CITROËN LOCALISED EMERGENCY CALL CITROËN LOCALISED ASSISTANCE CALL

In an emergency, press this button for more than Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request
2 seconds. Flashing of the green LED and a voice assistance if the vehicle breaks down.
messageg confirm that the call has been made to the A voice message confirms that the call has been made*.
CITROËN Emergency team*.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The green
LED goes off. The cancellation is confirmed by a voice message.
A press (at any time) of more than 8 seconds on this button, cancels the
request.
OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM
The green LED remains on (without flashing) when communication is
established. It goes off at the end of communication.
When the ignition is switched on, the
green LED comes on for 3 seconds
This call is dealt with by the CITROËN Emergency team which receives indicating that the system is operating
locating information from the vehicle and can send a detailed alert to the correctly.
appropriate emergency services. In countries in which the team is not
operational, or when the locating service has been expressly declined, If the orange LED flashes: there is a
the call is dealt with directly by the emergency services (112) without the system fault.
vehicle location. If the orange LED is on continuously: the
backup battery must be replaced.
In either case, contact a CITROËN
If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and dealer.
independently of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call
is made automatically. If you purchased your vehicle outside the CITROËN dealer network,
we invite you to have a dealer check the configuration of these services
If yyou benefit from the CITROËN eTouch offer,, yyou also have available and, if desired, modified to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country,
additional services in your MyCITROËN personal space, via the CITROËN configuration is possible in the official national language of your choice.
Internet website in your country, accessible on www.citroen.com.
For technical reasons, particularly to improve the quality of Telematic
* These services are subject to conditions and availability. services to customers, the manufacturer reserves the right to carry out
Consult a CITROËN dealer. updates to the vehicle's on-board telematic system.

224
 eMyWay
SATELLITE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
MULTIMEDIA BLUETOOTH
TELEPHONE AUDIO SYSTEM

CONTENTS
01 First steps - Control panel p. 226
02 Steering mounted controls p. 228
The system is protected in such a way that it will only
operate in your vehicle. 03 General operation p. 229
04 Navigation - Guidance p. 231
05 Traffic information p. 244
06 Using the telephone p. 247
07 Radio p. 257
08 Music media players p. 260
For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operations
which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is 09 Audio settings p. 266
stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent 10 Configuration p. 267
discharging of the battery, the system switches off
following the activation of the energy economy mode. 11 Screen menu map p. 268
Frequently asked questions p. 272

225
 01
Long press: open the "Audio settings" menu: music ambience, bass, treble, Selection and confirmation OK dial:
loudness, left/right balance, front/rear fader, automatic volume adjustment.
Selection of an item on the screen or in a list or a
menu, then confirmation with a short press.
Other than for menus and lists, a short press
Access to the "MUSIC" menu, and display of the displays a contextual menu depending on the
Access to the "RADIO" CD/MP3/Apple® tracks and folders. current screen.
menu and display the list of Long press: management of the sorting of MP3/ Rotation with map displayed: zoom the map scale
stations received. WMA files/update of the list of stations received. in and out.

Short press without the

engine running: on / off.
Short press with the engine
running: audio source off /
restore.

Volume adjustment (each

source is independent,
including TA messages and
navigation instructions).

Short press: select pre-set MODE button: Selection of the Access to the
radio station. type of permanent display. "Navigation - guidance"
Long press: pre-set Long press: black screen menu and display the
the current station. (DARK). recent destinations.

226
01 FIRST STEPS

Select:
- the previous/next line in a list or menu.
Open the - the previous / next media folder.
"Configuration" menu. Open the - step by step selection of the previous/
Long press: access "Telephone" menu next radio frequency.
to the GPS coverage and display the list of
and the navigation recent calls or accept - the previous / next MP3 folder.
demonstration mode. an incoming call. Move up/down, in "Move the map" mode.

Continuous press:
reinitialisation of the system.

Open the "Traffic ESC: abandon the current Select:

information" menu operation, up one level in - the next lower / higher radio
and display the the menu. frequency automatically.
current traffic alerts. Long press: return to the - the previous / next CD track, MP3
permanent display. track or media.
- the left / right of the screen when a
menu is displayed.
Move left / right in "Move the map" mode.

227
 02 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

Rotation: gives access to the short-cut menus

Successive presses: "Black Panel" mode - black depending on the display in the screen.
screen (night driving).
Short press: confirm the choice displayed in the screen.
Long press: return to the main menu.
Short press: abandon the current operation, reject an
Short press to make a telephone call. incoming call.
Call / End call. Long press: return to initial display.
Access the telephone menu. MENU
Menu: gives access to the main menu.
Display the call log.
Long press to reject an incoming call.
VOL +: increase volume.

VOL -: decrease volume.

Successive presses: mute / restore sound.

Press: repeat the current navigation instruction.
Short press: Radio: higher frequency.
Music players: next track.
Long press: fast play.

Successive presses: selection of the type of Short press: Radio: lower frequency.
information present in the screen. Music players: previous track.
Long press: fast play.

Short press: display the list of radio frequencies

LIST
available or tracks, albums, folders.
Long press: update the list of stations received.

228
 03 GENERAL OPERATION

Press the MODE button several times in succession for access to the following displays:

"MAP IN WINDOW"
"RADIO" (If navigation guidance in
progress)

"TELEPHONE"
"FULL SCREEN MAP"
(If conversation in progress)

Changing the audio source:

SETUP: PARAMETERS
RADIO: RADIO broadcasts.
date and time, display configuration, sound.
MUSIC: playing MUSIC.

For cleaning the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the
(spectacles cloth) is recommended, with no additional product. "Screen menu map" section.

229
 03 GENERAL OPERATION
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO CONTEXT

DTMF ring tones Select destination

1 1
A press on the dial gives access to
short-cut menus according to the Enter an address
display in the screen. Hang up 2
1

Directory
2

RADIO: MUSIC MEDIA

GPS coordinates
PLAYERS, CD or USB 2
Activate / Deactivate TA
1 (according to media): Divert route
1
Activate / Deactivate RDS Play modes:
1
Move the map
1
Guidance options Normal
1 1 Info. on location
2
Change waveband Random
2 1 Select as destination
2
Activate / Deactivate TA information Random on all media
2 1
Select as stage
2
Repetition
1
Save this place (contacts)
TELEPHONE 2

(call in progress): Quit map mode

FULL SCREEN MAP OR 2

1
Private mode IN A NEW WINDOW: 1
Guidance criteria

Stop / Restore guidance

1
Put call on hold 1

230
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Access to the "NAVIGATION" menu

"N
Navigation
ig tii - guidance
g id " Contact a CITROËN
dealer for mapping
updates.
Press NAV.

A long press on the end of the

lighting control stalk repeats
the last navigation message.

Go from the list to the menu (left/right).

To delete the list of recent destinations, select "Guidance
options" in the navigation menu then select "Delete last
destinations" and confirm. Select "Yes" then confirm.
Deleting just one destination is not possible.
or

231
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
SELECTING A DESTINATION Selection the town from the list offered, then confirm.
A pre-set list (by entering the first few letters) of the towns in the country selected
can be accessed directly by selecting and confirming "List" t on the screen.
TOWARDS A NEW DESTINATION

Turn the dial and select "OK" then

Press NAV to display the confirm.
"Navigation - guidance" menu.

Select "Select destination" and

confirm, then select "Enter an address" If possible, enter the "Road" and "N°/X"
and confirm. information in the same way.

Select "Archive" to save the address entered in a contact file.

Select the "Country" function then
confirm. The system allows up to 400 contact files to be recorded.

Select "Town" function then confirm to Confirm "OK" to start guidance.

enter the destination town.

Select the guidance criteria: "Fastest

route", "Shortest route" or optimised
Select the letters in the name of the "Distance/Time", then select the
town one at a time, confirming each one desired restriction criteria: "With tolls",
with the dial. "With Ferry", or "Traffic info" then
confirm "OK".

232
04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
SELECTING A DESTINATION

TO ONE OF THE RECENT DESTINATIONS TOWARDS A CONTACT IN THE CONTACTS DIRECTORY

Press NAV to display the Navigation towards a contact imported from your telephone is only
"Navigation - guidance" menu. possible if the address is compatible with the system.

Select the desired destination and Press NAV to display the

confirm to start guidance. "Navigation - guidance" menu.

Select "Select destination" and

confirm, then select "Directory" and
confirm.

Selection the desired destination from

your contacts and confirm "OK" to start
the guidance.

233
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

TOWARDS GPS COORDINATES TOWARDS A POINT ON THE MAP

Press NAV to display the With the map displayed, press OK to

"Navigation - guidance" menu. display the contextual menu. Select
"Move the map" and confirm.

Select "Select destination" and Move the cursor using the control to
confirm, then select "GPS coordinates" identify the desired destination.
and confirm.

Enter the GPS coordinates and confirm

"OK" to start the guidance. Press OK to display the contextual
menu for "Move the map" mode.

Select "Select as destination" or

"Select as stage" and confirm.

234
04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

TOWARDS POINTS OF INTEREST (POI) The points of interest (POI) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity
(hotels, various businesses, airports...).

Press NAV to display the Select "Search by Name" to search for POIs by name and not by
"Navigation - guidance" menu. proximity.

Select the "Enter an address" function Search for POIs in the categories
and confirm, then select Select suggested in the following pages.
destination and confirm.

To select a POI close to your current

location, select "POI" and confirm, then Select the POI and confirm "OK" to start
select "Around the current place" and the guidance.
confirm.
To select a POI as a stage on the route,
select "POI" and confirm, then select "On
the route" and confirm.
To select a POI as a destination, first
enter the country and town (see "Towards
a new destination"), select "POI" and
confirm, finally select "Near"
r and confirm.

235
 This icon appears when several POIs are grouped
04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon
shows details of the POIs.

LIST OF PRINCIPAL POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)

* According to availability in the

The detailed procedure for updating POIs can be found at "http://citroen.navigation.com". country.
236
04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
ALERT PARAMETERS
RISK AREAS

These functions are only available if risk areas have been

Press NAV to display the "Navigation - downloaded and installed on the system.
guidance" menu. The detailed procedure for updating risk area POIs can be found at
www.citroen.com.

Select "Guidance options" and confirm,

then select "Set parameters for risk
areas" and confirm.

Select:
- "Visual alert"
- "Audible alert"
- "Alert only in guidance"
- "Overspeed alarm only".
The choice of time of notification defines
how long in advance that Risk area
warnings are given.
Select "OK" to confirm the screen.

237
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
ADDING A STAGE ORGANISING STAGES

Press NAV to display the To organise stages, carry out operations

"Navigation - guidance" menu. 1 to 2 again, then select "Order/delete
journey legs" and confirm.

Select "Journey leg and route" then Select the stage that you want to move
confirm. in the order.

Select "Add a stage" then confirm. Select and confirm to save

The address of the stage is entered as the modifications.
a destination, by "Enter an address",
a contact in "Directory", or "Previous
destinations".

Select "Delete" to delete the stage.

Select "Close to" a route passing

close to the stage or "Strict" for a route
passing through the stage.
Confirm "OK" to start the guidance, and
give a general indication of the guidance
route.

238
04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
ROUTE OPTIONS

CALCULATION CRITERIA

Select "Define calculation criteria" and

confirm.
This function allows modification of:
Press NAV to display the - the guidance criteria: ("Fastest
"Navigation - guidance" menu. route", "Shortest route",
"Distance/Time"),
- the exclusion criteria: ("With tolls"
or "With Ferry"),
- traffic avoidance: ("Traffic info").

If traffic avoidance (Traffic info) is selected, the system suggests

an alternative route if there is a delay on the guidance route.

Select "Guidance options" and confirm.

Select "OK" and confirm to save

the modifications.

239
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
MAP MANAGEMENT

SELECTING THE POINTS OF INTEREST DISPLAYED ON THE MAP

Select from the various categories the

Press NAV to display the ones that you want to display on the
"Navigation - guidance" menu. screen.

Select "By default" to have only "Oil stations, garages" and

Select "Map management" and confirm. "Accident-prone area" appear on the map (if installed in the
system).

Select "OK" then confirm and select

Select "Map details" and confirm. "OK" again then confirm to save the
modifications.

240
04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

MAP ORIENTATION

Select:
- "Vehicle direction" to have the map
Press NAV to display the follow the direction of travel,
"Navigation - guidance" menu. - "North direction" to keep the map
always North up,
- "Perspective view" to display a
perspective view.

Select "Map management" and confirm. The colour of the map, different from the day and night mode,
is configured in the "SETUP" menu.

Select "Map orientation" and confirm. Street names are visible on the map from the 100 m scale.

241
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
ADJUSTING THE GUIDANCE SPEECH SYNTHESIS

ADJUSTING THE VOLUME/DEACTIVATION The volume setting of guidance messages is also accessible via the
"SETUP" / "Voice synthesis" menu.

The volume of messages can be adjusted during the transmission

of the message using the volume adjustment control. Select the volume graph and confirm.

Press NAV to display the Adjust the volume to the desired level
"Navigation - guidance" menu. and confirm.

Select "Guidance options" and confirm. Select "Deactivate" to deactivate voice messages.

Select "Set speech synthesis" and Select "OK" and press the dial
confirm. to confirm.

242
04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

MALE VOICE / FEMALE VOICE

Press SETUP to display

the configuration menu.

Select "Voice synthesis" and confirm.

Select "Select male voice" or "Select

female voice" then confirm "Yes"
to activate a male or female voice.
The system restarts.

243
 05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION
Access to the "TRAFFIC INFORMATION" menu

"T
Traffi
Traffic
affic information
i fo attio "

Press "TRAFFIC".

Go from the list to the menu (left/right).

or

244
 05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION
CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AND DISPLAY OF TMC MESSAGES
TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages contain information on traffic and weather conditions, received in real time and transmitted to the
driver in the form of audible announcements and symbols on the navigation map.
The navigation system can then suggest an alternative route to avoid a traffic problem.

The system offers a choice of:

- "Retain all the messages",
Press the TRAFFIC button to display the or
Traffic information menu.
- "Retain the messages"
● "Around the vehicle", (confirm
the mileage to modify and select
the distance),
● "On the route".

Select the "Geographic filter"

r function
and confirm.
Confirm "OK" to save the modifications.

We recommend:
- a filter on the route and
- a filter around the vehicle of:
- 12 miles (20 km) in urban areas,
- 30 miles (50 km) on motorways.

245
 05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION
PRINCIPAL TMC SYMBOLS RECEIVING TA MESSAGES

Black and blue triangle: general information, for example: The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic report
is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, USB, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the
message.

Press RADIO to display the "FM / AM

band" menu.

Red and yellow triangle: traffic information, for example:

Select "Guidance options" then

confirm.

Select "Activate / Deactivate TA" then

confirm.

The volume setting for TA messages can be adjusted only during the
transmission of this type of alert.

Activate or deactivate the function at any time by pressing the button.

During a message, press the button to interrupt it.

246
06 USING THE TELEPHONE
Access to the "TELEPHONE" menu

In the top bar of the permanent

"T
Telephone
elep
pho e" display

No telephone connected.
Press PHONE.

Telephone connected.

Incoming call.

Outgoing call.

Synchronisation
of address book in
progress.
Telephone call in
progress.

To make a call, select a number in the list and confirm "OK" Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
to start the call.

or
Connecting a different telephone deletes the list of
recent calls.

247
 06 USING THE TELEPHONE
For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention
PAIRING A BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth
mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the audio unit must be
FIRST CONNECTION carried out with the vehicle stationary.

Visit www.citroen.co.uk for more information (compatibility,

additional help, ...).
Select "Peripherals search" and
confirm.
The list of peripherals detected is
displayed. Wait until the "Connect"
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth button is available.
function and ensure that it is "shown to
all" (telephone configuration).

Select the name of the desired

peripheral from the list of devices
detected then select "Connect" and
confirm.
Press this button.

The system offers to connect the

telephone:
- in "Hands-free mode" (telephone
only),
- in "Audio" mode (streaming: playing
Select "Bluetooth functions" and music files on the telephone),
confirm. - or "All" (for selection of both
modes).
Select "OK" and confirm.

248
06 USING THE TELEPHONE
The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone
manual and with your network provider for details of the services available to you.

Then accept automatic connection on the telephone to allow the

The "Hands-free mode" should be used in preference if telephone to reconnect automatically every time the vehicle is
"Streaming" is not desired. started.

The ability of the system to connect in only one mode depends on Depending on the type of telephone, the system will ask you to
the telephone. The two modes may both connect by default. accept or not the transfer of your contacts.

On return to the vehicle, the last telephone connected

automatically reconnects, within around 30 seconds after
Select a code for the connection then switching on the ignition (Bluetooth activated and visible).
confirm "OK". To modify the automatic connection mode, remove the pairing
and pair the telephone again with the desired mode.

Enter the same code on the telephone then accept

the connection.

249
 06 USING THE TELEPHONE
DIRECTORY / SYNCHRONIZING CONTACTS

Selection "Synchronization options":

Press PHONE then select "Contacts - No synchronization: only the
management" and confirm. contacts saved in the system
(always present).
- Display telephone contacts: only the
contacts saved in the telephone.
- Display SIM card contacts: only the
contacts saved on the SIM card.
Select "New contact" to enter a new - Display all phone contacts:
contact. contacts on the SIM card and in the
telephone.

Select "Contact mem. status" to see the

Select "Delete all contacts" to delete number of contacts saved in the system
the contacts saved in the system. or imported, and the free memory.

Select "Import all the entries" to import

all the contacts in the telephone and
save them in the system.
Once imported, a contact remains visible
whatever telephone is connected.

250
06 USING THE TELEPHONE
MANAGING CONTACTS

Press PHONE then select "Directory of Select "Import" to copy one contact to
contacts" and confirm. the system.

Select the desired contact and confirm. Select "Delete" to delete a contact saved
in the system.

Select "Call" to start the call.

Select OK or ESC to exit this menu.

Select "Open" to view an external contact

or modify a contact saved in the system.

It is necessary to import an external contact to modify the record.

It will be saved in the system. It is not possible to modify or delete
contacts in the telephone or the SIM card via the Bluetooth
connection.

251
 06 USING THE TELEPHONE
Use of the telephone is not recommended while driving.
MAKING A CALL We recommended that you park safely or make use of the steering
mounted controls.

CALLING A NEW NUMBER CALLING A CONTACT

Press TEL or twice on PHONE.

Press PHONE twice.

Select "Directory of contacts" then

confirm.

Select "Dial" then confirm.

Select the desired contact and confirm.

If access was via the PHONE button,
select "Call" and confirm.

Dial the telephone number using the

virtual keypad selecting each number
in turn.
Confirm "OK" to make the call. Select the number and confirm to start
the call.

252
06 USING THE TELEPHONE
ENDING A CALL

CALLING A RECENTLY ENTERED NUMBER

Press PHONE then select "OK" to end
the call.

Press TEL, select "Call list" and

confirm, Or make a long press on TEL at the
steering mounted controls.

or

press PHONE to display the calls log. Or make two short presses on TEL at
the steering mounted controls.

Select the desired number and confirm.

Or press the MODE button, as many

times as necessary, until the telephone
screen is displayed.
To erase the calls log, press PHONE twice, select "Phone
functions" and confirm then select "Delete calls log" and
confirm. Press "OK" to display the contextual
menu then select "Hang up" and
confirm.

253
 06 USING THE TELEPHONE
RECEIVING A CALL

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display

on the screen.

"Yes" to accept the call is selected by

default.
Press "OK" to accept the call.
Select "No" and confirm to reject the
call.

A short press on TEL accepts an

incoming call.
A long press on TEL rejects an incoming
call.

254
 06 USING THE TELEPHONE
OPTIONS DURING A CALL*

Select "DTMF ring tones" to use the

numerical keypad, so as to navigate
During a call, press the MODE button through the menu of an interactive vocal
several times to select display of the server.
telephone screen, then press "OK"
to open the contextual menu.

Select "Hang up" to end the call.

Or make a short press on this button.

It is possible to hold a 3-way conference

call by making 2 calls in succession*.
Select "Private mode" and confirm Select "Conference mode call" in the
to take the call on the handset. contextual menu accessible using this
Or select "Hands-free mode" and button.
confirm to take the call via the vehicle's
speakers.

Select "Put call on hold" and confirm

to put the current call on hold.
Or select "Resume the call" and
confirm to resume the call on hold.

* Depending on the compatibility of the phone and your service plan.

255
 06 USING THE TELEPHONE
MANAGING PAIRED TELEPHONES CHANGING THE RING TONE

Press PHONE twice.

Press PHONE twice.

Select "Phone functions" and confirm.

Select "Bluetooth functions".

Select "Ring options" and confirm.

Select "List of the paired peripherals"
and confirm.

It is possible to:
- "Connect" or "Disconnect" the You can adjust the volume and the type
selected telephone, of ring tone.
- delete the pairing of the selected
telephone.
It is also possible to select all pairings.

Select "OK" and confirm to save the

changes.

256
07 RADIO
Access to the "RADIO" menu

"FM / AM band
b d"
d"

Press RADIO.

Go from the list to the menu (left/right).

Press  or  or use the rotary control to select the or

previous or next station in the list.

257
 07 RADIO
SELECTING A STATION PRESETTING A STATION

The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...) may interfere with the reception, including in RDS station tracking mode.
This phenomenon is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in any way indicate a fault with the audio system.

The quality of reception is represented by the number of

active waves in this symbol.
After selecting a station, press one of the buttons
on the numerical keypad for 2 seconds to preset the
By alphabetical list current station.
Press RADIO or LIST, select the station An audible signal confirms that the station has been preset.
of your choice and confirm.

By automatic frequency search Press the button on the numerical keypad to recall a
Press  or  for the automatic search preset station.
for a lower or higher radio frequency. Or press then turn the thumb wheel at the steering
Or turn the thumb wheel at the steering mounted controls.
mounted controls.

By manual frequency search

Press  or  to adjust the radio
frequency step by step.

258
07 RADIO
ACTIVATE / DEACTIVATE RDS
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue listening to the same
station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However,
in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be
assured throughout the entire country as radio stations do not
cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of
the station during a journey.

Radio displayed, press "OK" to display

the contextual menu.
Press RADIO.
Select "Activate / Deactivate RDS".

Select "Guidance options" and confirm.

Select "Activate / Deactivate RDS" and

confirm.

259
 08 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Access to the "MUSIC MEDIA PLAYER" menu

"MEDIA
MEDIA""

Press MUSIC.

Go from the list to the menu (left/right).

or

260
 08 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
CD, MP3 CD / USB PLAYER

INFORMATION AND ADVICE

The audio equipment will only play audio files with ".wma, .aac, .flac, .ogg and The system supports USB mass storage or iPod
.mp3" file extensions and with a bit rate of between 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. devices via the USB port (suitable cable not supplied).
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. Control of the peripheral device is with the audio
No other type of file (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played. system controls.
WMA files must be of the standard wma 9 type. Other peripherals, not recognised on connection, must
The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44 and 48 KHz. be connected to the auxiliary socket using a Jack cable
(not supplied).

It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without using of

special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying
problems. In order to be read, a USB memory stick must be formatted FAT 16
or 32.

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording

it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.

261
 08 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

SOURCES SELECTION OF SOURCE

The MUSIC button allows a direct change to the next media source.
Insert the CD in the player, insert the USB
memory stick in the USB player or connect the
USB peripheral to the USB port using a suitable "CD / MP3 CD"
cable (not supplied).
The system builds playlists (in temporary
memory), an operation which can take from "RADIO" "USB, iPod"
a few seconds to several minutes at the first
connection.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
number of folders to reduce the waiting time. "STREAMING" "AUX"
The playlists are updated every time the ignition
is switched off or connection of a USB memory
stick. However, the system memorises these
lists and if they are not modified, the loading
time will be shorter.
Press MUSIC to display the "MEDIA"
Play starts automatically after a period which menu.
depends on the capacity of the USB memory
stick.

Select "Following media source" and

confirm.

Repeat the operation as many times as necessary to obtain the

desired media source (except for radio which is accessible with
RADIO).
262
 08 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

MUSIC: List of USB or CD tracks and

Previous track. folders

Next track. / Up or down in the list. / /

Previous folder.
Confirm, next menu level. / /

Next folder.

+ /
Fast forward. Long press / Up one menu level.

/
Fast backward. Long press /

263
 08 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
CONNECTING APPLE® PLAYERS AUDIO STREAMING

Connect the Apple® player to the USB port using a suitable cable
(not supplied). Streaming allows audio files on your telephone to be played via the
vehicle's speakers.
Play starts automatically.

Connect the telephone: see "USING THE TELEPHONE".

Control is via the audio system.
Select "Audio" or "All" profile.

The classifications available are those of the portable device

connected (artists / albums / genres / playlists / audiobooks /
podcasts). If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the
audio playback from the telephone.
The default classification used is by artist. To modify the classification
used, return to the first level of the menu then select the desired Control is from the peripheral device or by using the audio system
classification (playlists for example) and confirm to go down through buttons.
the menu to the desired track.

The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible Once connected in streaming mode, the telephone is considered to be
with the generation of your Apple® player. a media source.
The list of devices compatible with software versions is available from It is recommended that you activate "Repeat" on the Bluetooth
CITROËN dealers. peripheral.

264
08 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
USING THE AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX)
JACK/RCA AUDIO CABLE NOT SUPPLIED

Connect the portable device (MP3, WMA player…) to the RCA audio
sockets (white and red) using a JACK-RCA audio cable. Press MUSIC to display the "MUSIC"
menu.

Select "Activate / Deactivate AUX

input" and confirm.
First adjust the volume of your portable
device (to a high level). Then adjust the
volume of your audio system.

Display and management of the controls are via the portable device.

265
 09 AUDIO SETTINGS

They are accessible by the MUSIC

button in the control panel or by a long The distribution (or spatialisation using the Arkamys© system) of sound
press on RADIO according to the source is an audio process that allows the audio quality to be adapted to the
in use. number of listeners in the vehicle.

- "Equalizer"
r (choice of 6 musical ambiences)
- "Bass"
- "Treble"
The audio settings (Equalizer, r Bass, Treble and Loudness) are
- "Loudness" (Activate/Deactivate) different and independent for each sound source.
- "Distribution" ("Driverr", "All passengers") The settings for distribution and balance are common to all sources.
- "Le-Ri balance" (Left/Right)
- "Fr-Re balance" (Front/Rear)
- "Auto. Volume" depending on road speed (Activate/Deactivate)

266
10 CONFIGURATION
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

Select "Choose colour" r and confirm to

select the screen colour harmony and
the map presentation mode:
Press SETUP to display the - day mode,
"Configuration" menu. - night mode,
- automatic day/night mode,
according to whether the
headlamps are on.

Select "Adjust luminosity" and confirm

to adjust the screen brightness.
Select "Display configuration" and Press "OK" to save the changes.
confirm.
The settings for day and night are
independent.

267
 11 SCREEN MENU MAP
MAIN FUNCTION Previous destinations
3 "TRAFFIC" MENU
Order/delete journey legs
2
OPTION A
1

2
Divert route 1 Geographic filter
option A1
2
Chosen destination Retain all the messages
2
2
option A2
3
Retain the messages
OPTION B...
1 Guidance options 2

1
Define calculation criteria Around the vehicle
3
2

"Navigation - guidance" 2
Set speech synthesis 3
On the route
MENU
2
Delete last destinations 1 Select TMC station
Automatic TMC
1 Select destination 2
Set parameters for risk areas 2

Enter an address Manual TMC

2 1 Map management 2

Directory List of TMC stations

2
Map orientation 2
2

2
GPS coordinates (Archive) Map details 1 Display / Do not display
messages
2

1 Journey leg and route 2

Move the map / "Vehicle monitoring"

Add a stage Mapping and updating

2 2

Enter an address Description of risk areas database

3 2

Directory Stop / Restore guidance

3 1

268
 11 SCREEN MENU MAP
Phone MENU "RADIO" MENU

Display all phone contacts

1 Dial 3 1 Change Waveband
1 Directory of contacts 2
Contact mem. status
1 Guidance options
2
Call 1 Phone functions 2
Activate / Deactivate TA

Open 2
Ring options Activate / Deactivate RDS
2 2

Import 2
Delete calls log Audio settings
2 1

2
Delete 1 Bluetooth functions 2
Equalizer

1 Contacts management 2
List of the paired peripherals
3
None

New contact Connect Classical

2 3 3

Delete all contacts Disconnect Jazz

2 3 3

Import all the entries Delete Rock

2 3 3

Synchronizing contacts Delete all Techno

2 3 3

No synchronization Peripherals search Vocal

3 2 3

Display telephone contacts Rename radiotelephone

3 2

3
Display SIM card contacts 1 Hang up

269
 11 SCREEN MENU MAP
2
Bass "MUSIC" MENU "SETUP" MENU
Treble
2

Loudness 1 Change Media 1 Display configuration

2

Distribution 1 Eject USB support 2

Choose colour
2

Driver 1 Read mode 3

Harmony
3
Normal Cartography
2 3
All passengers
3
Random Day mode
2 4
Le-Ri balance
2
Random on all media Night mode
2 4
Fr-Re balance
2
Repetition Auto Day/Night
2 4
Auto. Volume
2

1 Audio settings (same as RADIO) 2

Adjust luminosity
1 Update radio list
1 Activate / Deactivate AUX input 2
Set date and time

Select units
2

1 Speech synthesis setting

Guidance instructions volume
2

Select male voice / Select female voice

2

270
 11 SCREEN MENU MAP
1 Select language
1 Define vehicle parameters*
Parking assistance
2

Operation of wipers
2

Engage rear wiper in REVERSE

3

Lighting configuration
2

Duration of guide-me home lighting

3

Directional headlamps
3

Mood lighting
3

Daytime running lamps

3

* The parameters vary according to the vehicle.

271
 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.

QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

The route calculation is The guidance criteria may conflict with the current location (exclusion of Check the guidance criteria on the Navigation
not successful. toll roads on a toll motorway). Menu, "Guidance options"\ "Define calculation
criteria".

The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.

The POIs have not been downloaded. Download the POIs from the website:
"http://citroen.navigation.com".

The Risk areas audible The audible warning is not active. Activate audible warnings in the Guidance options
warning does not work. menu, "Navigation - guidance", "Set parameters
for risk areas".

The system does not The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages. Select the "Traffic info" function in the list of
suggest a detour around guidance criteria.
an incident on the route.

I receive a Risk area alert Other than guidance, the system announces all Risk areas positioned in a Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of
which is not on my route. cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for a Risk area the Risk area. Select "On the route" to no longer
located on nearby or parallel roads. receive alerts other than guidance or to reduce the
time for the announcement.

272
 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Certain traffic jams On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive Wait until the traffic information is being received
along the route are not the traffic information. correctly (display of the traffic information icons on
indicated in real time. the map).

The filters are too restrictive. Modify the "Geographic filter" settings.

In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for This phenomenon is normal. The system is
the traffic information. dependent on the traffic information available.

The altitude is not On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes Wait until the system has started up completely.
displayed. to receive more than 4 satellites correctly. Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least
4 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then
select "GPS coverage").

Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, This phenomenon is normal. The system
the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary. is dependent on the GPS signal reception
conditions.

I cannot connect my The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the telephone - Check that your telephone's Bluetooth
Bluetooth telephone. may not be visible. function is switched on.
- Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".

The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. A list of compatible Bluetooth mobile telephones is
available from the dealer network.

The volume of the The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio system,
telephone connected to maximum if required, and increase the volume
in Bluetooth mode is of the telephone if necessary.
inaudible.
The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of telephone Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows,
communication. reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, ...).

273
 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Some contacts are The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the contacts Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
duplicated in the list. on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. When both telephone contacts".
synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be duplicated.

Contacts are not shown Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings Modify the display setting in the telephone
in alphabetical order. chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order. directory.

The system does not receive The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to the
SMS text messages. system.

The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any - Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
automatically or is not audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. right way up.
played by the player. - Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
Le CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with the player. - Check the content in the case of a recorded
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
recognised by the audio system. - The audio system's CD player does not play
DVDs.
- Some recorded CDs will not be played by
the audio system because they are not of the
correct quality.
There is a long waiting period When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of This phenomenon is normal.
following the insertion of a data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from a few seconds to a
CD or connection of a USB few minutes.
memory stick.
The CD player sound is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
poor. conditions.

The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.

274
 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Some characters in the The audio system does not display some types of characters. Use standard characters to name tracks and
media information are not folders.
displayed correctly while
playing.

Playing of streaming files The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device.
does not start.

The names of tracks and The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.
the track length are not
displayed on the screen
when streaming audio.

The quality of reception The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
of the radio station to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the short-cut menu to enable the system to check
listened to gradually vehicle is travelling. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the
deteriorates or the stored geographical area.
stations do not function
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
displayed...). reception, including in RDS mode. a fault with the audio system.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.
through a car wash or into an underground car park).

I cannot find some radio The station is not received or its name has changed in the list.
stations in the list of
stations received.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name
(the title of the song for example).
The name of the radio The system interprets this information as the name of the station.
station changes.

275
 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
In changing the setting The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the balance settings. Modify the balance or equalizer settings to obtain
of treble and bass the Modifying one without the other is not possible. the desired musical ambience.
equalizer setting is
deselected.

In changing the equalizer

setting, treble and bass
return to zero.

When changing the The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings. Modify the balance or distribution settings to
balance settings, the Modifying one without the other is not possible. obtain the desired musical ambience.
distribution setting is
deselected.

When changing an
distribution setting,
the balance setting is
deselected.

There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Volume, Bass, Treble, Check that the audio settings for (Volume, Bass,
sound quality between Equalizer and Loudness can be adapted to the different sound sources, Treble, Equalizer, Loudness) are adapted to
the different audio which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the
sources (radio, CD...). CD...). AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Fr-Re balance,
Le-Ri balance) to the middle position, select the
"None", musical ambience and set the loudness
correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or
to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.

276
 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
With the engine off, the When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
system switches off after the battery charge. charge.
a few minutes of use. The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and
switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.

Playback of my USB Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down access Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
memory stick starts only to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the catalogue time). and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
after a very long wait structure on the memory stick.
(around 2 to 3 minutes).

When I connect my When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces the Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port
iPhone as telephone and streaming function. The streaming function takes the place of the USB (the USB function takes priority over streaming).
to the USB port at the function which is then not useable, there is a period without sound of the
same time, I am unable track being played with Apple® players.
to play the music files.

277
278
 AUDIO SYSTEM / BLUETOOTH®

CONTENTS
Your Audio system is coded in such a way that it will
only operate in your vehicle. 01 First steps p. 280
02 Steering mounted controls p. 281
03 Main menu p. 282
04 Audio p. 283
05 USB Box p. 286
06 Bluetooth functions p. 289
For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operations 07 Screen menu map p. 292
which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is
stationary.
Frequently asked questions p. 297
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the audio equipment may
switch off after a few minutes.

279
 01 FIRST STEPS

Audio settings: front/ Display the list of

Select source: rear fader, left/right local stations.
radio, audio CD / MP3 CD, USB, Select wavebands balance, bass/treble, Long press: CD
Jack connection, Streaming, FM1, FM2, FMast loudness, audio tracks or MP3 folders Abandon the current
AUX. and AM. ambiences. (CD / USB). operation.

TA (Traffic Announcements)
on/off.
Eject CD. Long press: PTY* (radio
Programme TYpe) mode.

Select the screen display Automatic frequency search

mode: down/up.
Date, audio functions, trip Select previous/next CD, MP3
computer, telephone. or USB track.

On/off, volume setting. Confirm.

The DARK button changes the screen display Buttons 1 to 6: Display main menu. Select next frequency down/up.
for improved driving comfort at night. Select a pre-set radio station. Select previous/next MP3 folder.
1st press: upper bar only illuminated. Long press: pre-set a station. Select previous/next folder / genre /
2nd press: black screen. artist / playlist (USB).
3rd press: return to standard display.

* Available according to version.

280
02 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

Press:
Activation/deactivation of Black Panel mode
(night driving). Access to the short-cut menus depending on the display in the screen.
Confirm a function selected from a menu.
Rotation:
Select the previous/next pre-set RADIO station.
Accept an incoming call / end a call in progress. Select previous/next CD or MP3 folder.
Open the telephone menu and display the call log. Abandon the current operation.
Long press: reject an incoming call. MENU
Reject an incoming call.
Long press: return to general display.

Access to the main menu.

Increase volume.

Decrease volume.

Mute.

RADIO: automatic search for a lower/higher frequency.

CD / MP3:
select the previous/next track.
press and hold: fast forward/rewind play.

RADIO: display the list of stations available.

Long press: update the list of radio stations.
LIST
CD / MP3:
display the list of CD tracks and and folders.

281
 03
TELEPHONE:
Bluetooth hands-free,
AUDIO FUNCTIONS: pairing, management
radio, CD, USB, options. of a call.

> MONOCHROME SCREEN C

TRIP COMPUTER: entering PERSONALISATION-

of distances, alerts, status of CONFIGURATION:
functions. vehicle parameters,
display, languages.

> MONOCHROME SCREEN A

For a detailed global view of

the menus available, refer to
the "Screen menu map" in this
section.

282
 The external environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, ...)

04 AUDIO may block reception, including in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the
way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not indicate any failure of
the audio system.

RADIO
SELECTING A STATION
RDS

Press the SOURCE button several

times in succession and select the Press the MENU button.
radio.

Select AUDIO FUNCTIONS then

Press the BAND AST button to select press OK.
a waveband: FM1, FM2, FMast, AM.

Select the FM WAVEBAND

Briefly press one of the buttons to PREFERENCES function then
carry out an automatic search of the press OK.
radio stations.

Select ACTIVATE RDS then

Press one of the buttons to carry out press OK. RDS appears on the
a manual search up / down for radio screen.
frequencies.

In radio mode, press OK directly to activate / deactivate RDS mode.

Press the LIST REFRESH button to
display the list of stations received The RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the same
locally (30 stations maximum). station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain
To update this list, press for more conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the
than two seconds. country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. Under conditions
of very weak reception, the system may change to a regional station.

283
 04 AUDIO
CD
RECEIVING TA MESSAGES
PLAYING A CD

The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert Insert circular compact discs only.
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs or CDs copied using a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic personal recorder, may cause faults which are no reflection on the
report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is quality of the original player.
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the Without pressing the EJECT button, insert a CD in the player, play
message. begins automatically.

To play a disc which has already been

Press the TA button to activate or inserted, press the SOURCE button
deactivate traffic messages. several times in succession and
select CD.

Press one of the buttons to select a

track on the CD.

Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of tracks on

the CD.

Press and hold one of the buttons for

fast forwards or fast backwards.

284
04 AUDIO
MP3 CD MP3 CD
PLAYING AN MP3 COMPILATION INFORMATION AND ADVICE

Insert an MP3 compilation in the player.

The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1.2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3,
The audio equipment searches for all of the music tracks, which is an audio compression standard which permits the recording of
may take anything between a few seconds and several tens of several tens of music files on a single disc.
seconds, before play begins.

On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 files spread
over 8 folder levels. However, it is advisable to keep to a limit of In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when
two levels to reduce the access time before the CD is played. recording, the ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet file format is
recommended.
While the CD is being played, the folder structure is not followed.
If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played
All of the files are displayed on a single level. correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording format is always
To play a disc which has already used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible
been inserted, press the SOURCE (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.
button several times in succession In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet format is
and select CD. recommended.
Press one of the buttons to select a
folder on the CD.
The audio system will only play files with the extension ".mp3" with
a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of file
Press one of the buttons to select a (.wma, .mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
track on the CD.

Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of directories of It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters without using
the MP3 compilation. special characters (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying
problems.

Press and hold one of the buttons for

fast forward or backward play. Empty CDs are not recognised and may damage the system.

285
 05
The list of compatible
p equipment
q p and the compression rates supported
USING THE USB BOX are available from CITROËN dealers.

CONNECTING A USB MEMORY STICK

This unit consists of a USB port and an auxiliary

Jack socket*. The audio files are transmitted Connect the memory stick to the port, directly or
from a portable device - digital player or a USB using a lead. If the audio equipment is switched
memory stick - to your Audio system and heard on, the USB source is detected as soon as it
via the vehicle's speakers. is connected. Play begins automatically after a
delay which depends on the capacity of the USB
memory stick.
The file formats supported are .mp3 (mpeg1
layer 3 only), .wma (standard 9 only,
128 kbits/sec compression), .wav and .ogg.
USB memory stick (1.1, 1.2 and 2.0) or Apple® Certain playlist formats are supported (.m3u, ...).
player of generation 5 or later:
On reconnection of the previous memory stick
- USB memory sticks should be formatted FAT used, play is resumed automatically with the last
or FAT 32 (NTFS not supported), track played.
- the Apple® player lead is essential,
- navigation through the file database is also
possible by means of the steering mounted
controls. The system puts together playlists (temporary memory) created
over a period which depends on the capacity of the USB device.
The other sources are available during this time.
The playlists are updated each time the ignition is switched off or
each time a USB memory stick is connected.
Other Apple® players of earlier generations and
players using the MTP protocol*: When connecting for the first time, the classification suggested
is by folder. When you reconnect, the classification selected
- play via Jack-Jack lead only (not supplied), previously is retained.
- navigation through the file database is from
the portable device.
* According to vehicle.
286
05 USB BOX
USING THE USB PORT

Press one of these buttons to gain

Press and hold LIST to display the access to the previous / next track on
different classifications. the classification list currently being
Select by Folder / Artist / Genre / Playlist, played.
press OK to select the classification Press and hold one of the buttons for
required, then press OK again to confirm. fast forward or backward play.

Press one of these buttons to

- by Folder: all folders containing audio gain access to the previous / next
files recognised on the peripheral Genre, Folder, Artist or Playlist on
device. the classification list currently being
- by Artist: all of the artist names played.
defined in the ID3 Tags, classified in
alphabetical order.
- by Genre: all of the genres defined in
the ID3 Tags. CONNECTING AN APPLE® PLAYER VIA THE USB PORT
- by Playlist: in accordance with the
playlists recorded on the USB device.
The lists available are Artist, Genre and Playlist (as defined in
the Apple® player).
Selection and Navigation are described in steps 1 to 4 above.

previously selected classification.

Navigate through the list using the left/
right and up/down buttons. Do not connect a hard disk or USB connection device other
than audio equipment to the USB port. This could damage your
Confirm the selection by pressing OK. installation.

287
 05 USB BOX
USING THE AUXILIARY SOCKET (AUX) ADJUSTING THE VOLUME OF
RCA SOCKET THE AUXILIARY SOURCE

The RCA auxiliary socket permits the connection of a portable device

(MP3 player...). First adjust the volume of your portable device.

Connect the portable device (MP3

player…) to the audio sockets (white and Then adjust the volume of your audio
red, RCA type) using a suitable cable (not system.
supplied).

Press the SOURCE button several The display and control is via the portable device.
times in succession and select AUX.

288
06 BLUETOOTH FUNCTIONS
The services offered depend on the network, the SIM card and the
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used.
SCREEN C Consult your telephone's manual and your operator to find out which
(Available according to model and version) services are available to you.

PAIRING A TELEPHONE / FIRST CONNECTION The first 4 telephones recognised are displayed in this window.

For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention The TELEPHONE menu permits access to the following functions
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth in particular: Directory*, Call list, Pairing management.
mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your
audio equipment must be carried out with the vehicle stationary
and the ignition on. * If your telephone is fully compatible.

Go to www.citroen.co.uk for more information (compatibility, more Select the telephone to be connected from the list. Only one
help, ...). telephone can be connected at a time.

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function A virtual keypad is displayed in the

and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone screen: enter a code with at least 4 digits.
configuration.
Confirm by pressing OK.

A message is displayed in the screen of the

Press the MENU button. telephone chosen. To accept the pairing, enter the
same code on the telephone, then confirm with OK.
In the menu, select: If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not limited.
- Bluetooth telephone function -
Audio A message that the pairing has been successful appears in the screen.
- Bluetooth configuration
- Perform a Bluetooth search The automatic connection authorised is only active after the
telephone has been configured.
A window is displayed with a message that a search is in progress. The directory and the call list can be accessed after the
synchronisation period.
289
 06 BLUETOOTH FUNCTIONS

MAKING A CALL

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed

display in the vehicle's screen. From the Bluetooth telephone function Audio menu, select Manage
the telephone call then Call, Call list or Directory.

Select the YES tab on the display Press this button for more than two
using the buttons and confirm by seconds for access to your directory,
pressing OK. then navigate with the thumb wheel.
Or
To dial a number, use your
telephone's keypad, with the vehicle
stationary.

Press this button to accept the call.

ENDING A CALL

During a call, press this button for

more than 2 seconds.
Confirm with OK to end the call.

290
06 BLUETOOTH FUNCTIONS
BLUETOOTH AUDIO STREAMING*

Wireless transmission of the telephone's music files via the audio Activate the streaming source by
equipment. The telephone must be able to manage the appropriate pressing the SOURCE button**.
Bluetooth profiles (Profiles A2DP / AVRCP). The tracks to be played can be
controlled as usual via the buttons on
the audio system control panel and
the steering mounted controls***.
Initiate the pairing between the telephone and The contextual information can be
the vehicle. This pairing can be initiated from displayed on the screen.
the vehicle's telephone function menu or via the
telephone's keypad. See steps 1 to 9 on the previous
pages. During the pairing phase, the vehicle must be * Depending on the compatibility of the telephone.
stationary with the key in the ignition.
** In certain cases, playing of the Audio files must be initiated from the
keypad.
*** If the telephone supports the function.
Select the telephone to be connected from the telephone function
menu.
The audio system connects to a newly paired telephone
automatically.

291
 07 SCREEN MENU MAP
MONOCHROME A 1
RADIO-CD 1
OPTIONS
RDS SEARCH DIAGNOSTICS
2 2

REG MODE CONSULT

2 3

1
MAIN FUNCTION CD REPEAT ABANDON
2 3

OPTION A RANDOM PLAY

2
2

OPTION A1
3

OPTION A2
3

1
VEHICLE CONFIG*
OPTION B...
2

REV WIPE ACT

2

GUIDE LAMPS
2

* The parameters vary according to vehicle.

292
 07 SCREEN MENU MAP
1
UNITS 1
DISPLAY ADJUST 1
LANGUAGE

TEMPERATURE: °CELSIUS / °FAHRENHEIT YEAR FRANCAIS

2 2 2

FUEL CONSUMPTION: MONTH ITALIANO

2 2
KM/L - L/100 - MPG
2
DATE NEDERLANDS
2 2

HOUR PORTUGUES
2 2

MINUTES PORTUGUES-BRASIL
2 2

12 H/24 H MODE DEUTSCH

2 2

ENGLISH
2

ESPANOL
2

293
 07 SCREEN MENU MAP

MONOCHROME C Press the OK dial for access to short-cut menus according to the display
on the screen:

RADIO CD / MP3 CD USB

activate / deactivate RDS activate / deactivate Intro activate / deactivate track repeat (of the
1 1
current folder / artist / genre / playlist)
activate / deactivate REG mode activate / deactivate track repeat 1
1
(the entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
activate / deactivate radiotext 1
1

activate / deactivate random play (of the

current folder / artist / genre / playlist)
activate / deactivate random play 1
(the entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
1

294
 07 SCREEN MENU MAP

MONOCHROME C AUDIO FUNCTIONS TRIP COMPUTER

1 1

Pressing the MENU button displays: ENTER DISTANCE TO DESTINATION

FM BAND PREFERENCES 2
2

alternative frequencies (RDS) Distance: x miles

3 3

activate / deactivate ALERT LOG

4 2

regional mode (REG) Diagnostics

3 3

activate / deactivate STATUS OF THE FUNCTIONS*

4 2

radio-text information (RDTXT) Functions activated or deactivated

3 3

activate / deactivate
4

2
PLAY MODES

3
album repeat (RPT)

activate / deactivate
4

track random play (RDM)

3

activate / deactivate
4

* The parameters vary according to vehicle.

295
 07 SCREEN MENU MAP

1
PERSONALISATION-CONFIGURATION 1
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
DEFINE THE VEHICLE PARAMETERS* BLUETOOTH CONFIGURATION
2 2

DISPLAY CONFIGURATION Connect/Disconnect a device

2
3

video brightness adjustment Telephone function

3
3

normal video Audio Streaming function

4
3

inverse video
4 Consult the paired device
4
brightness (- +) adjustment
4 Delete a paired device
4
date and time adjustment
3 Perform a Bluetooth search
4
day/month/year adjustment
4 CALL
2
hour/minute adjustment
4
Calls list
3
choice of 12 h / 24 h mode
4
Directory
4
choice of units
3
MANAGE THE TELEPHONE CALL
2
l/100 km - mpg - km/l
4
Terminate the current call
3
°Celsius / °Fahrenheit
4
Activate private mode
3
CHOICE OF LANGUAGE
2
* The parameters vary according to vehicle.

296
 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
sound quality between Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the different audio which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
sources (radio, CD...). CD...). the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the musical ambience "None" and
set the loudness correction to the "Active" position
in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio
mode.
The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any - Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
automatically or is not audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. right way up.
played by the player. The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not - Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
recognised by the audio equipment. be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.

The message "USB The battery of the peripheral may not be sufficiently charged. Recharge the battery of the peripheral device.
peripheral error" is
displayed on the screen.
The Bluetooth connection The USB memory stick is not recognised. Reformat the memory stick.
is cut. The memory stick may be corrupt.
The CD player sound is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
poor. conditions.

The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.

297
 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

The stored stations do An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the BAND AST button to return to the
not function (no sound, waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the
87.5 Mhz is displayed...). stations are stored.

The traffic announcement The radio station is not part of the regional traffic information network. Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic
(TA) is displayed. I do information.
not receive any traffic
information.

The quality of reception The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened Activate the RDS function to enable the system
of the radio station to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the to check whether there is a more powerful
listened to gradually vehicle is travelling. transmitter in the geographical area.
deteriorates or the stored
stations do not function The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is reception, including in RDS mode. a failure of the audio equipment.
displayed...).
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.
through a car wash or into an underground car park).

Sound cut-outs of 1 to During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is
2 seconds in radio mode. permitting better reception of the station. too frequent and always on the same route.

With the engine off, When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating time Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
the audio equipment depends on the battery charge. charge.
switches off after a few The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode
minutes of use. and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.

The message "the audio In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is too Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to
system is overheated" high, the audio equipment switches to an automatic thermal protection allow the system to cool.
appears on the display. mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of the playing of
the CD.

298
 VISUAL SEARCH

Exterior (Saloon)

Remote control key....................... 67-72

- opening / closing
- anti-theft protection
- starting Accessories ..................................... 205
- battery Panoramic sunroof ............................ 82
Roof bars ......................................... 201

Very cold climate screen.................. 203

Exterior lighting controls ............... 86-89 Fuel tank ............................................ 84
Headlamp adjustment........................ 89
Changing bulbs......................... 181-185
- front lamps
- foglamps Tailgate .............................................. 79
- direction indicator repeaters Temporary puncture repair kit ... 174-176
Lane departure warning system ...... 154 Changing a wheel ..................... 177-180
- tools
- removing

Door mirrors....................................... 65
Front and/or rear visual and
audible parking sensors................... 157
Towbar ............................................. 200
Doors ............................................ 77-79 Towing ...................................... 198-199
- opening / closing
- central locking
- emergency control
Child lock ..........................................113 Changing bulbs................. 185-186, 189
Tyre under-inflation detection ....115-116
Electric windows ........................... 75-76 - rear lamps
Braking assistance ...........................117 - 3rd brake lamp
Trajectory control ..............................118 - number plate lamps
Tyre pressures ................................. 221

299
 VISUAL SEARCH

Exterior (Tourer)

Remote control key....................... 67-72

- opening / closing
- anti-theft protection
- starting Accessories ..................................... 205
- battery Panoramic sunroof ............................ 83
Roof bars ......................................... 201

Very cold climate screen.................. 203

Exterior lighting controls ............... 86-89 Fuel tank ............................................ 84
Headlamp adjustment........................ 89
Changing bulbs......................... 181-185
- front lamps
- foglamps Boot ................................................... 80
- direction indicator repeaters Reversing camera ........................... 158
Lane departure warning system ...... 154 Temporary puncture repair kit ... 174-176
Changing a wheel ..................... 177-180
- tools
- removing

Door mirrors....................................... 65
Front and/or rear visual and
audible parking sensors................... 157
Towbar ............................................. 200
Doors ............................................ 77-79 Towing ...................................... 198-199
- opening / closing
- central locking
- emergency control
Child lock ..........................................113
Tyre under-inflation detection ....115-116
Electric windows ........................... 75-76 Changing bulbs......................... 187-189
Braking assistance ...........................117 - rear lamps
Trajectory control ..............................118 - 3rd brake lamp
Tyre pressures ................................. 221 - number plate lamps

300
 VISUAL SEARCH

Interior

Side blinds ....................................... 100 Seat belts.................................. 119-121

Boot fittings (Saloon) ....................... 101 Glove box .......................................... 98

- stowing rings
Boot fittings (Tourer) ........................ 102
- stowing rings
- hooks
- storage net...
Load space cover (Tourer)............... 103
Luggage retaining net
(Tourer) ..................................... 103-104

Airbags ..................................... 122-125

Child seats ................................ 105-108

ISOFIX mountings .................... 109-112

Front seats.................................... 60-63

Rear seats .................................... 63-64

301
 VISUAL SEARCH

Instruments and controls

Courtesy lamps............................. 94-95

Rear view mirror ........................... 65-66
Instrument panels .............................. 26
Interior mood lighting ......................... 96
Stop & Start ..................................... 141 Warning lamps .............................. 32-38
Sun visor............................................ 98
Multifunction screens .................... 43-46 Indicators ...................................... 39-41
Hazard warning lamps ......................114 Gear efficiency indicator .................. 136
Buttons .............................................. 42
- trip recorder
- lighting dimmer
Parking space sensors .................... 155
Interior fittings ............................. 98-100
- glove box
- ski flaps
- auxiliary sockets
- mats... Steering wheel adjustment ................ 66

Windows ....................................... 75-76

Dashboard fuses ...................... 191-193 Door mirrors....................................... 65

Opening the bonnet ......................... 162 Ventilation ..................................... 47-48

Mono-zone digital air conditioning.... 49-51
Dual-zone digital air conditioning ... 52-55
Programmable heating ................. 56-59

"Hydractive III +"

electronic suspension ...................... 159
Manual / electronic /automatic Emergency or
gearboxes .......... 135, 137-140, 144-147 assistance call .................. 114, 223-224
Hill start assist ................................. 134 eMyWay ........................................... 225
Parking brake, manual..................... 126
Audio system ................................... 279
Parking brake, electric .............. 127-133
Setting the date/time.................... 44, 46

302
 VISUAL SEARCH

Steering mounted controls

Fixed centred controls

steering wheel .......................... 148-149
Lighting ......................................... 86-89
- sidelamps / dipped beam headlamps Trip computer ............................... 29-30
- main beam headlamps
Automatic illumination of headlamps ... 88
Daytime running lamps ...................... 88
Automatic rain sensitive wipers ......... 93
Wash-wipe ......................................... 93
Audio system controls ..................... 149

Headlamp adjustment........................ 89

Wipers .......................................... 92-94

Speed limiter............................. 150-151

Cruise control ........................... 152-153
Horn ..................................................114

Steering wheel adjustment ................ 66

303
 VISUAL SEARCH

Technical data - Maintenance

Petrol engines.................................. 207
Petrol weights ........................... 208-209
Diesel engines .......................... 210-211
Diesel weights .......................... 212-215
Commercial version weights (Tourer)... 216
Dimensions (Saloon) ................ 217-218
Running out of fuel - Diesel ............. 164 Checking components .............. 172-173
Dimensions (Tourer) ................. 219-220 - battery
Identification markings ..................... 221 - air / passenger compartment filter
- oil filter
- particle emission filter (Diesel)
- brake pads / discs
Very cold climate protection............. 202

Checking the levels .................. 170-171

- oil
- brake fluid Engine
- power steering fluid compartment fuses ........... 191, 194-195
- coolant
- screenwash / headlamp wash fluid

Changing bulbs......................... 181-190

- front Battery ...................................... 196-197
- rear Energy economy mode.................... 198

Opening the bonnet ......................... 162

Petrol under-bonnet layout ....... 165-166
Diesel under-bonnet layout....... 167-169

304
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

A ABS and EBFD systems ....... 117 A Audio C Changing

Accessories ........................... 205 system ..........................279-298 a bulb ...........................181-190
Accessory socket, Automatic illumination of Changing a fuse .............191-195
12 volt.................................. 100 headlamps....................... 86, 88 Changing a wheel ..........177-180
Adjusting headlamps ............... 89 Automatic operation Changing a wiper blade .......... 94
Adjusting head of hazard warning lamps ..... 114 Changing the remote
restraints ......................... 60, 63 Automatic rain sensitive control battery ....................... 71
Adjusting seat belt height ...... 120 windscreen wipers........... 92, 93 CHECK .................................... 31
Adjusting the steering Auxiliary Checking levels ............. 170, 171
wheel ..................................... 66 sockets .......... 99, 261, 246, 286 Checking the engine
Airbags, curtain ............. 124, 125 oil level .......................... 40, 170
Airbags, front ......................... 125 Checks ...........................162-173
Airbags, lateral .............. 124, 125 Child lock ............................... 113
Air conditioning ...... 24, 48, 49, 53 Children .... 76, 106-113, 121, 123
B Battery ........................... 172, 196 Child seats .................... 105, 107
Air conditioning, Battery, charging ................... 197
digital ..................................... 52 Child seats,
Battery, remote control ...... 71, 72 conventional ................ 107, 108
Air conditioning,
Battery compartment Closing the boot ...................... 68
mono-zone ............................ 49
fuse box............................... 191 Closing the doors .............. 68, 77
Air diffuser ............................... 47
Blind for panoramic Cold climate screen ............... 203
Air distribution
sunroof .................................. 83 Connectors,
adjustment....................... 50, 53
Blinds .................................... 100 audio ............. 99, 261, 264, 286
Air filter .................................. 172
Bluetooth Control for panoramic
Air flow .................................... 24
(hands-free)................. 248, 289 sunroof blind.......................... 83
Air flow adjustment ............ 49, 52
Air intake ................................. 49 Bluetooth (telephone) .... 248, 289 Coolant level ................... 41, 171
Air recirculation ................. 49, 52 Bonnet ................................... 162 Coolant temperature
Air vents ............................ 47, 48 Bonnet stay ........................... 162 indicator................................. 41
Alarm ....................................... 73 Boot ................................... 79, 80 Courtesy lamps ....................... 94
Alert / warning log ............. 31, 45 Boot (fittings) ................. 101, 102 Cruise control ........................ 152
Alloy wheels .......................... 204 Brake discs ............................ 173 Cup holder ....................... 99, 100
Anti-lock braking system Brake lamps .................. 185, 187
(ABS)................................... 117 Brake pads ............................ 173
Anti-pinch .................... 75, 82, 83 Brakes ................................... 173
Anti-theft .................................. 69 Braking assistance system .... 117 D Date (setting) ..................... 44, 46
Armrest, front .......................... 99 Daytime running lamps ... 88, 181
Armrest, rear ......................... 100 Deactivating the passenger
Assistance call .............. 114, 224 airbag .................................. 123
Audible warning ..................... 114 C Capacity, fuel tank ................... 84 Deadlocking ............................ 68
Audio streaming CD MP3 ......................... 261, 285 Defrosting .......................... 50, 55
(Bluetooth)................... 264, 291 Central locking .................. 68, 77 Demisting .......................... 50, 55
305
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

D Demisting the rear E Engine oil .............................. 170 G Gear lever, manual gearbox ... 135
screen ................. 49, 51, 52, 55 Engine oil level indicator ... 40, 170 Glove box ................................ 98
Diesel additive level .............. 171 Engines ......................... 207, 210 Guidance ....................... 232, 239
Dimensions ........................... 217 Environment ...... 24, 72, 173, 199 Guide-me-home .......... 69, 88, 89
Dipped beam ................... 86, 181 Equipment settings .................. 45
Dipstick ............................ 40, 170 ESP/ASR ............................... 118
Directional lighting ............. 90, 91
Direction H Hands-free kit ................ 248, 289
indicators ............. 114, 181, 187 Hazard warning lamps .......... 114
Doors ....................................... 77 F Filling with fuel ................... 84, 85 Headlamp adjustment ............. 89
Doors emergency control ........ 78 Fitting a wheel ....................... 179 Headlamps, directional .......89-91
Driving economically ............... 24 Fitting roof bars ..................... 201 Headlamp wash ...................... 93
Driving positions Fittings, boot .................. 101, 102 Headlamp wash reservoir ..... 171
(storing) ................................. 63 Flashing indicators ................ 114 Head restraints, front ......... 60, 61
Foglamps, front ............... 87, 184 Head restraints, rear ......... 63, 64
Foglamps, rear ........ 87, 185, 187 Heated seats ..................... 60, 62
Folding the rear seats ............. 64 Heating .................. 24, 48, 49, 53
Front seats .........................60-63 Height and reach adjustment,
E EBA (Emergency braking steering wheel ....................... 66
assistance) .......................... 117 Fuel ............................. 24, 84, 85
High load retaining net .......... 103
Eco-driving .............................. 24 Fuel consumption .................... 24
Hill start assist ....................... 134
Economy mode ..................... 198 Fuel filler cap ........................... 84 Horn ...................................... 114
Electric window controls .......... 75 Fuel filler flap ..................... 84, 85 Hydractive III+ suspension .... 159
Electronic brake force Fuel gauge ........................ 41, 84
distribution (EBFD) .............. 117 Fuel tank ........................... 84, 85
Electronic engine Fusebox, dashboard ............. 191
immobiliser ...................... 69, 72 Fuses .................................... 191
I Identification plates ............... 221
Emergency boot release ......... 79 Indicators, direction ............... 114
Emergency braking Indicator lamps,
system ................................. 117 status................................32-38
Emergency call .............. 114, 224 G G.P.S. .................................... 231 Inflating tyres ................... 24, 221
Emergency warning lamps .... 114 Gearbox, automatic ....... 144, 173 Inputs for audio
eMyWay .......................... 45, 225 Gearbox, electronic ....... 137, 141 system ........... 91, 261, 264, 286
Energy economy mode ......... 198 Gearbox, Instrument panel lighting ......... 42
Engine, Diesel ................. 85, 167 manual ........ 135, 136, 141, 173 Instrument panels .................... 26
Engine, petrol .................. 85, 165 Gear efficiency indicator ........ 136 Instrument panel screen... 26, 136
Engine compartment ..... 165, 167 Gear lever, automatic gearbox... 144 Interior mood lighting ............... 96
Engine compartment Gear lever, ISOFIX child seats ...109, 111, 112
fusebox................................ 196 electronic gearbox system ... 137 ISOFIX mountings ................. 109
306
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

J Jack ....................................... 177 M Main beam ...................... 86, 181 P Paint colour code .................. 221
JACK socket .................. 265, 286 Maintenance ............................ 24 Paintwork, matt ..................... 204
Map reading lamps .................. 94 Panoramic glass sunroof ......... 83
Markings, identification .......... 221 Parking brake ........ 126, 127, 173
Massage function .................... 62 Parking brake, electric ........... 127
K Keeping children Mat .......................................... 99 Parking sensors, rear ............ 157
safe ........ 76, 106-113, 121, 123 Menu, main ..................... 27, 282 Parking space sensor ............ 155
Mirror, rear view ................ 65, 66 Particle emission filter .... 171, 172
Key with remote
Mirrors, door ............................ 65 Passenger compartment
control ........................67-69, 72 Misfuel prevention ................... 85 filter ..................................... 172
Motorway function Player, CD MP3 ............. 261, 285
(direction indicators) ............ 114 Port, USB ........................ 99, 286
Mountings for ISOFIX Priming the fuel system ......... 163
L Labels, seats.................................... 109 Programmable heating
identification ........................ 221 MP3 CD ......................... 261, 285 (Webasto).............................. 56
Lamps, warning and Multifunction screen ................ 43 Protecting
indicator............................32-38 Music media players ..... 260, 284 children ..... 76, 106-113, 121, 123
Lane Departure Warning Puncture ................................ 174
System (LDWS) .................. 154
Level, brake fluid ................... 170
Level, headlamp wash .......... 171 N Navigation ............................. 231
Level, power steering fluid .... 170 Number plate R Radio ............................. 257, 283
Levels and lamps................................... 189 RCA sockets .................. 265, 288
checks ..........................165-173 Reading lamps, rear ................ 94
Lighting .................................... 96 Rear demisting .................. 50, 55
Lighting, Recharging the battery .......... 197
guide-me home ......... 69, 88, 89 O Oil filter .................................. 172 Regeneration of the particle
Lighting, interior ....................... 94 Oil level ........................... 40, 170 emissions filter .................... 172
Lighting bulbs Oil temperature indicator ......... 41 Reinitialising the electric
(replacement) ...............181-190 Opening the bonnet ............... 162 windows ................................ 75
Lighting control stalk ............... 86 Opening the boot ..................... 67 Reinitialising the remote
Lighting dimmer ....................... 42 Opening the doors ............. 67, 77 control ................................... 71
Lighting on reminder ............... 87 Opening the fuel filler Reinitialising the sunroof ......... 82
Loading ................................... 24 flap ........................................ 84 Remote control ...................67-72
Load space cover .................. 103 Opening the panoramic Removable screen
Localised assistance call ....... 224 sunroof blind.......................... 83 (snow shield) ....................... 203
Localised emergency call ...... 224 Opening the sunroof ................ 82 Removing a wheel ................. 179
Locating your vehicle .............. 69 Operation indicator Removing the mat ................... 99
Locking from the inside ........... 77 lamps................................34-38 Repair kit, puncture ............... 174
307
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

R Replacing S Service indicator ................ 39, 40 T Technical

bulbs.............................181-190 Servicing ........................... 24, 40 data .............................. 207-211
Replacing fuses ..............191-195 Setting the clock ................ 44, 46 Telephone ...................... 247, 289
Replacing the air filter ........... 172 Short-cut menus .................... 230 Temperature, coolant .............. 41
Replacing the oil filter ............ 172 Sidelamps ....... 86, 181, 185, 187 Temperature adjustment ... 49, 52
Replacing the passenger Side repeater ......................... 185 Temperature control
compartment filter ............... 172 Ski flap .................................... 98 for heated seats .................... 62
Replacing wiper blades ........... 94 SNOW MOTION .................... 118 Temporary tyre repair kit ....... 174
Resetting the service Spare wheel .......................... 177 TMC (Traffic info) .................. 245
Speed limiter ......................... 150 Tools ...................................... 177
indicator................................. 40 Speedometer ........................... 26
Resetting the trip recorder ....... 42 Total distance recorder ............ 42
Stability control (ESP) ........... 118
Rev counter ............................. 26 Starting the vehicle .......... 70, 137 Towbar ................................... 200
Reversing camera ................. 158 Steering lock ........................... 70 Towing another vehicle .......... 198
Reversing lamp ............. 185, 187 Steering mounted Traction control (ASR) ........... 118
Risk areas (update) ............... 236 controls........................ 228, 281 Traffic information
Roof bars ............................... 201 Steering wheel, (TA) ..................... 246, 259, 284
Routine checks .............. 172, 173 fixed centred controls .......... 148 Traffic information
Running out of fuel (Diesel) ... 163 Stopping the vehicle ........ 70, 137 (TMC) .......................... 245, 246
Stop & Start .......... 30, 51, 55, 84, Trailer .................................... 200
141, 162, 172, 196 Trip computer .................... 29, 30
Storage compartments ............ 99 Trip distance recorder ............. 42
Storing driving positions .......... 63 Tyre pressures ...................... 221
S Screen, colour and Stowing rings ......................... 101 Tyres ....................................... 24
mapping ...................... 229, 268 Sunroof .................................... 82 Tyre under-inflation detection ... 115
Screen, Sun visor ................................. 98
monochrome ....... 282, 292, 294 Suspension,
Screen, monochrome C .......... 43 electronic control ................. 159
Screen, multifunction ............... 43 Synchronising
Screen, multifunction the remote control ................. 71 U Under-inflation (detection) ..... 115
(with audio equipment) .......... 45 Synthesiser, voice ................. 242 Unlocking ................................ 67
Screen-wash reservoir .......... 171 System, navigation ................ 232 Unlocking from the inside ........ 77
Screen menu Systems, ASR and ESP ........ 118 Update risk areas .................. 236
map ..................... 268, 292, 294 USB Player ............................ 286
Screenwash, front ................... 93
Screenwash fluid level .......... 171
Seat adjustment ................ 60, 61 T Table
Seat belts ....................... 119-121 of weights .... 208, 209, 212, 216 V Vehicle configuration ............... 45
Seats, rear ............................... 64 Tables of engines ... 207, 210, 211 Vehicle identification .............. 221
Security bolts ......................... 180 Tables of fuses ...................... 191 Ventilation .......................... 47, 48
Serial number, vehicle ........... 221 Tank, fuel ................................. 85 Very cold protection ............... 202
308
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

W Warning lamps ...................32-38

Wash-wipe, rear ...................... 92
Weights ......... 208, 209, 212, 216
Welcome function .................... 62
Welcome lighting ..................... 96
Wheel, changing ................... 177
Window controls ...................... 75
Wiper, rear ............................... 92
Wiper control stalk ............. 92, 93
Wipers ............................... 92, 93

X Xenon headlamps ................. 181

309
310
311
312
This handbook describes all of the equipment Automobiles CITROËN declares, by application
available in the whole range. of the provisions of the European regulation
Your vehicle will be fitted with some of this (Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life Vehicles,
equipment described in this document, depending that it achieves the objectives set by this regulation
on its trim level, version and the specification for and that recycled materials are used in the
the country in which it is sold. manufacture of the products that it sells.
The descriptions and illustrations are given without Reproduction or translation of all or part of this
any obligation. Automobiles CITROËN reserves handbook is prohibited without written authorisation
the right to modify the technical specifications, from Automobiles CITROËN.
equipment and accessories without having to
update this edition of the handbook. For any work on your vehicle, use a qualified
This document is an integral part of your vehicle. It workshop that has the technical information,
should be passed on to the new user in the event competence and equipment required, which
of sale or transfer. a CITROËN dealer is able to provide. Printed in the EU
Anglais
03-12
12.C5.0030
Anglais
2012 – DOCUMENTATION DE BORD
4Dconcept
Diadeis
Edipro

CRÉATIVE TECHNOLOGIE